JVC GET0467 001A User Manual

CD RECEIVER  
KD-APD38/KD-PDR30  
KD-APD38/KD-PDR30  
KD-APD38/KD-PDR30  
RECEPTOR CON CD  
RÉCEPTEUR CD  
For canceling the display demonstration, see page 6.  
Para cancelar la demostración en pantalla, consulte la página 6.  
Pour annuler la démonstration des affichages, référez-vous à la page 6.  
For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.  
Para la instalación y las conexiones, refiérase al manual separado.  
Pour l’installation et les raccordements, se référer au manuel séparé.  
For customer Use:  
Enter below the Model  
No. and Serial No. which  
are located on the top or  
bottom of the cabinet. Retain  
this information for future  
reference.  
INSTRUCTIONS  
MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES  
MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS  
Model No.  
Serial No.  
GET0467-001A  
[J]  
How to reset your unit  
CONTENTS  
Control panel — KD-APD38/KD-PDR30 ........  
4
5
Remote controller — RM-RK50 .............  
Getting started................................  
Basic operations...................................................  
6
6
Your preset adjustments will also be erased.  
Radio operations .............................  
7
Disc operations................................  
Playing a disc in the unit .....................................  
8
8
How to forcibly eject a disc  
iPod operations ............................... 11  
Sound adjustments.......................... 13  
General settings — PSM .................. 14  
External component operations ....... 16  
Maintenance ................................... 16  
More about this unit ........................ 17  
Troubleshooting.............................. 21  
Specifications.................................. 23  
Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.  
If this does not work, reset your unit.  
How to use the M MODE button  
If you press M MODE, the unit goes into functions mode,  
then the number buttons and 5/buttons work as  
different function buttons.  
Ex.: When number button 2 works as MO (monaural)  
button.  
Detaching the control panel  
To use these buttons for their original functions  
again after pressing M MODE, wait for 5 seconds  
without pressing any of these buttons until the  
functions mode is cleared or press M MODE again.  
Attaching the control panel  
KD-APD38 is equipped with the steering wheel  
remote control function.  
• See the Installation/Connection Manual (separate  
volume) for connection.  
3
Control panel —  
KD-APD38 / KD-PDR30  
Parts identification  
Display window  
1
Control dial  
o
;
a
s
RND (random) button  
M MODE button  
2 0 (eject) button  
3
4
5
Loading slot  
EQ (equalizer) button  
DISP (display) button  
(control panel release) button  
Disc information indicators—  
TAG (Tag information), (track/file), (folder)  
DISC indicator  
Playback mode / item indicators— RND (random),  
(disc), (folder), RPT (repeat)  
Tuner reception indicators—MO (monaural),  
ST (stereo)  
6 4 /¢ buttons  
d
f
7
8
9
Display window  
(standby/on attenuator) button  
AUX (auxiliary) input jack  
g
p 5 (up) / (down) buttons  
q
w
e
r
SEL (select) button  
BAND button  
SRC (source) button  
Remote sensor  
DO NOT expose the remote sensor to strong light  
(direct sunlight or artificial lighting).  
MO (monaural) button  
SSM (Strong-station Sequential Memory) button  
Number buttons  
h
j
k
l
/
z
S.BASS (super bass) indicator  
EQ (equalizer) indicator  
Tr (track) indicator  
Source display / Time countdown indicator  
Main display  
Sound mode (iEQ: intelligent equalizer)  
indicators—JAZZ, ROCK, HIP HOP, CLASSIC, POPS,  
USER  
t
y
u
i
RPT (repeat) button  
4
Main elements and features  
Remote controller  
RM-RK50  
Installing the lithium coin battery  
(CR2025)  
1
(standby/on/attenuator) button  
• Turns the power on if pressed briefly or  
attenuates the sound when the power is on.  
• Turns the power off if pressed and held.  
For USA-California Only:  
This product contains a CR Coin Cell Lithium Battery  
which contains Perchlorate Material—special  
handling may apply.  
2 5 U (up) / D (down) buttons  
• Changes the FM/AM bands with 5 U.  
• Changes the preset stations with D .  
• Changes the folder of the MP3/WMA discs.  
• While listening to an Apple iPod.  
– Pauses or resumes playback with D .  
– Enters the main menu with 5 U.  
(Now 5 U/D /2 R/F 3 work as the menu  
selecting buttons.)*  
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate  
Aim the remote controller directly at the remote  
sensor on the unit. Make sure there is no obstacle  
in between.  
Warning:  
3
VOL – / VOL + buttons  
• Adjusts the volume level.  
SOUND button  
• Selects the sound mode (iEQ: intelligent  
equalizer).  
• Do not install any battery other than CR2025 or its  
equivalent; otherwise, it may explode.  
• Do not leave the remote controller in a place  
(such as dashboards) exposed to direct sunlight  
for a long time; otherwise, it may explode.  
• Store the battery in a place where children cannot  
reach to avoid risk of accident.  
• To prevent the battery from over-heating,  
cracking, or starting a fire:  
– Do not recharge, short, disassemble, heat the  
battery, or dispose of it in a fire.  
– Do not leave the battery with other metallic  
materials.  
– Do not poke the battery with tweezers or  
similar tools.  
– Wrap the battery with tape and insulate when  
throwing away or saving it.  
4
5
SOURCE button  
• Selects the source.  
6 2 R (reverse) / F (forward) 3 buttons  
• Searches for stations if pressed briefly.  
• Fast-forwards or reverses the track if pressed and  
held.  
• Changes the tracks if pressed briefly.  
• While listening to an iPod (in menu selecting  
mode):  
– Selects an item if pressed briefly. (Then, press  
D to confirm the selection.)  
– Skips 10 items at a time if pressed and held.  
* 5 U : Returns to the previous menu.  
D : Confirms the selection.  
5
To drop the volume in a  
moment (ATT)  
Getting started  
To restore the sound, press  
the button again.  
Basic operations  
~ Turn on the power.  
To turn off the power  
Ÿ
Basic settings  
• See also “General settings — PSM” on pages 14 and  
15.  
1
2
1
*
You cannot select “CD” as the playback source  
if there is no disc in the unit.  
“NO IPOD” appears if iPod is not connected.  
2
*
! For FM/AM tuner  
1 Canceling the display demonstrations  
Select “DEMO,” then “DEMO OFF.”  
2 Setting the clock  
Select “CLOCK H” (hour), then adjust the hour.  
Select “CLOCK M” (minute), then adjust the  
minute.  
Adjust the volume.  
VOL 20  
3
Finish the procedure.  
Volume level appears.  
@ Adjust the sound as you want. (See  
To check the current clock time while the  
power is turned off  
page 13.)  
Clock time is shown on the display for  
about 5 seconds. See also page 14.  
Caution on volume setting:  
Discs produce very little noise compared with other  
sources. Lower the volume before playing a disc  
to avoid damaging the speakers by the sudden  
increase of the output level.  
6
When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to  
receive  
Radio operations  
~
Lights up when monaural mode is activated.  
Ÿ
MONO  
Lights up when receiving an FM stereo  
broadcast with sufficient signal strength.  
Reception improves, but stereo effect will be lost.  
88.3  
To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same  
procedure. “MONO OFF” appears and the MO indicator  
goes off.  
! Start searching for a station.  
Storing stations in memory  
When a station is received, searching stops.  
To stop searching, press the same button  
again.  
You can preset six stations for each band.  
FM station automatic presetting—  
SSM (Strong-station Sequential  
Memory)  
To tune in to a station manually  
In step ! above...  
1
1
Select the FM band (FM1 – FM3) you want to  
store into.  
M
2
Select a desired station frequency.  
2
3
SSM  
“SSM” flashes, then disappears when automatic  
presetting is over.  
Local FM stations with the strongest signals are  
searched and stored automatically in the FM band.  
7
Manual presetting  
Ex.: Storing FM station of 92.5 MHz into preset  
number 4 of the FM1 band.  
Disc operations  
Playing a disc in the unit  
All tracks will be played repeatedly until you change the  
source or eject the disc.  
1
2
FM I 92.5  
3
P4  
92.5  
Preset number flashes for a while.  
To stop play and eject the disc  
Listening to a preset station  
• Press SRC to listen to another  
playback source.  
1
2
To fast-forward or reverse the track  
To go to the next or previous tracks  
Select the preset station (1 – 6) you want.  
or  
To go to the next or previous folders (only for  
MP3 or WMA discs)  
To check other information while listening  
to the radio  
Clock Ô Frequency  
8
To locate a particular track (for CD) or folder  
(for MP3 or WMA discs) directly  
Other main functions  
To select a number from 01 – 06:  
Skipping tracks quickly during play  
• For MP3 or WMA discs, you can skip tracks within the  
same folder.  
To select a number from 07 – 12:  
Ex.: To select track 32 while playing a track whose  
number is a single digit (1 to 9)  
1
2
• To use direct folder access on MP3/WMA discs, it  
is required that folders are assigned with 2-digit  
numbers at the beginning of their folder names—  
01, 02, 03, and so on.  
Each time you press the button, you can skip 10  
tracks.  
• After the last track, the first track will be selected  
and vice versa.  
To select a particular track in a folder  
(for MP3 or WMA discs):  
3
Prohibiting disc ejection  
You can lock a disc in the loading slot.  
NO EJECT  
To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same  
procedure.  
9
Changing the display information  
While playing an audio CD or a CD Text  
Selecting the playback modes  
You can use only one of the following playback modes  
at a time.  
1
2
Select your desired playback mode.  
Repeat play  
7
While playing an MP3 or a WMA track  
• When “TAG DISP” is set to “TAG ON”  
(see page 15)  
Mode  
Plays repeatedly  
TRK RPT  
: The current track.  
FLDR RPT* : All tracks of the current folder.  
RPT OFF  
: Cancels.  
7
Random play  
• When “TAG DISP” is set to “TAG OFF”  
Mode  
Plays at random  
FLDR RND* : All tracks of the current folder,  
then tracks of the next folder  
and so on.  
DISC RND  
: All tracks of the current disc.  
: Clock with the current track number  
: Elapsed playing time with the current  
track number  
: Corresponding indicator lights up on  
the display  
RND OFF  
: Cancels.  
* Only while playing an MP3 or a WMA disc.  
: Corresponding indicator lights up  
on the display  
1
2
*
*
If the current disc is an audio CD, “NO NAME” appears.  
If an MP3/WMA file does not have Tag information,  
folder name and file name appear. In this case, the  
TAG indicator will not light up.  
10  
Caution:  
iPod operations  
You can play songs from an Apple iPod through this unit  
by connecting it with the supplied connection cable for  
iPod.  
• Avoid using the iPod if it might hinder your safety  
driving.  
• Make sure all important data has been backed up  
to avoid losing the data.  
• Disconnecting the iPod will stop playback. Press SRC  
to listen to another playback source.  
To pause playback  
• For connection, see Installation/Connection Manual  
(separate volume).  
• For details, refer also to the manual supplied with  
your iPod.  
To resume playback, press the  
button again.  
~ Connect an iPod.  
To fast-forward or reverse the track  
To go to the next or previous tracks  
Connection cable for iPod  
If an iPod has been connected...  
Playback starts automatically from where it has  
been paused previously.  
Ÿ Adjust the volume.  
! Adjust the sound as you want. (See  
page 13.)  
11  
Selecting a track from the menu  
Selecting the playback modes  
1
2
Enter the main menu.  
1
2
Select your desired playback mode.  
7
Repeat play  
Now the 5//4 /¢ buttons work as  
the menu selecting buttons*.  
Mode  
Playback functions (as on iPod)  
Select the desired menu.  
ONE RPT : Same as “Repeat One.”  
ALL RPT  
RPT OFF  
: Same as “Repeat All.”  
: Cancels.  
7
Random play  
PLAYLIST Ô ARTISTS Ô ALBUMS Ô  
SONGS Ô GENRES Ô COMPOSER Ô  
(back to the beginning)  
Mode  
Playback functions (as on iPod)  
ALBM RND *: Same as “Shuffle Albums.”  
3
Confirm the selection.  
SONG RND : Same as “Shuffle Songs.”  
RND OFF : Cancels.  
To move back to the previous  
menu, press 5.  
* Functions only if you select “ALL” in “ALBUMS” of  
the main “MENU.”  
• If a track is selected, playback starts  
automatically.  
: Corresponding indicator lights up  
on the display  
• If the selected item has another layer, you will  
enter the layer. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until the  
desired track is played (see page 20).  
• Holding 4 /¢ can skip 10 items at  
a time.  
To check other information while listening  
to an iPod  
* The menu selecting mode will be canceled:  
– If no operations are done for about 5 seconds.  
– When you confirm the selection of a track.  
12  
Indication, [Range]  
BAS*2 (bass), [–06 to +06]  
Sound adjustments  
Adjust the bass.  
You can select a preset sound mode suitable to the  
music genre (iEQ: intelligent equalizer).  
MID*2 (mid-range), [–06 to +06]  
Adjust the mid-range frequencies sound level.  
TRE*2 (treble), [–06 to +06]  
Adjust the treble.  
FAD*3 (fader), [R06 to F06]  
Adjust the front and rear speaker balance.  
Preset values  
BAS*1 M ID*2 TRE*3 S.BS*4  
BAL*4 (balance), [L06 to R06]  
Adjust the left and right speaker balance.  
S.BS*2 (super bass), [S.BS ON or S.BS OFF],  
[01 to 05, initial: 03]*5  
Maintain the richness and fullness of the bass sound  
regardless of how low you set the volume.  
Indication (For)  
USER  
(Flat sound)  
00  
00  
00  
00  
00 OFF  
+02 ON  
+03 OFF  
ROCK  
(Rock or disco music)  
+03  
+01  
SUB.W*1 (subwoofer), [00 to 08, initial: 04]  
Adjust the subwoofer output level.  
CLASSIC  
(Classical music)  
VOL (volume), [00 to 30 or 50*6]  
Adjust the volume.  
POPS  
(Light music)  
+02 +01 +02 OFF  
+04 –02 +01 ON  
1
*
Displayed only when “L/O MODE” is set to “WOOFER”  
(see page 15).  
HIP HOP  
(Funk or rap music)  
2
*
When you adjust the bass, mid-range, treble, or super  
bass, the adjustment you have made is stored for the  
currently selected sound mode (iEQ) including “USER.”  
If you are using a two-speaker system, set the fader  
level to “00.”  
This adjustment will not affect the subwoofer output.  
Range adjustment for super bass is adjustable only  
when it is set to “S.BS ON.“  
JAZZ  
(Jazz music)  
+03  
00  
+03 OFF  
3
*
*1 : Bass; *2 : Mid-range; *3 : Treble; *4 : Super bass  
4
5
*
*
Adjusting the sound  
6
*
Depending on the amplifier gain control setting. (See  
page 15 for details.)  
You can adjust the sound characteristics to your  
preference.  
1
2
13  
General settings — PSM  
You can change PSM (Preferred Setting Mode) items  
listed in the table that follows.  
3
Adjust the PSM item selected.  
1
4
5
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust other PSM  
items if necessary.  
2
Select a PSM item.  
Finish the procedure.  
Indications  
Item  
: Initial)  
Setting, [reference page]  
(
DEMO  
• DEMO ON  
:
Display demonstration will be activated automatically if no operation  
Display  
demonstration  
is done for about 20 seconds, [6].  
Cancels.  
• DEMO OFF  
• ON  
:
:
CLK DISP*1  
Clock display  
Clock time is shown on the display at all times when the power is  
turned off.  
• OFF  
:
Cancels; pressing DISP will show the clock time for about 5 seconds  
when the power is turned off, [6].  
CLOCK H  
Hour adjustment  
1 – 12  
00 – 59  
[Initial: 1 (1:00)], [6].  
CLOCK M  
[Initial: 00 (1:00)], [6].  
Minute adjustment  
DIMMER  
Dimmer  
• ON  
• OFF  
:
:
Dims the display illumination.  
Cancels.  
SCROLL*2  
Scroll  
• ONCE  
• AUTO  
• OFF  
:
:
:
Scrolls the track information once.  
Repeats scrolling (at 5-second intervals).  
Cancels.  
• Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display  
regardless of the setting.  
1
*
*
If the power supply is not interrupted by turning off the ignition key of your car, it is recommended to select “OFF” to  
save the car’s battery.  
Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.  
2
14  
Indications  
Item  
Setting, [reference page]  
(
: Initial)  
L/O MODE  
Line output mode  
• REAR  
:
:
Select if both the LINE OUT terminals are used for connecting the  
speakers (through an external amplifier).  
Select if the REAR LINE OUT terminals are used for connecting a  
subwoofer (through an external amplifier).  
• WOOFER  
WOOFER*3  
Subwoofer cutoff  
frequency  
• LOW  
• MID  
• HIGH  
:
:
:
Frequencies lower than 90 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.  
Frequencies lower than 135 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.  
Frequencies lower than 180 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.  
AUX ADJ  
A.ADJ 00  
:
Adjust the auxiliary input level to avoid the sudden increase of the  
output level when changing the source from external component  
connected to the AUX input jack on the control panel.  
Auxiliary input level — A.ADJ 05  
adjustment  
TAG DISP  
Tag display  
• TAG ON  
• TAG OFF  
:
:
Shows the Tag information while playing MP3/WMA tracks, [10].  
Cancels.  
AMP GAIN  
Amplifier gain  
control  
• LOW PWR  
:
VOL 00 – VOL 30. (Select this if the maximum power of the speaker is  
less than 50 W to prevent damaging the speaker.)  
VOL 00 – VOL 50.  
• HIGH PWR  
:
:
AREA  
Tuner channel  
interval  
AREA US  
When using in North/Central/South America. AM/FM intervals are set  
to 10 kHz/200 kHz.  
When using in any other areas except North/Central/South America.  
AM/FM intervals are set to 9 kHz/50 kHz (100 kHz during auto search).  
When using in South American countries. AM/FM intervals are set to  
10 kHz/100 kHz.  
AREA EU  
:
:
AREA SA  
IF BAND  
Intermediate  
frequency band  
• AUTO  
• WIDE  
:
:
Increases the tuner selectivity to reduce interference noises between  
close stations. (Stereo effect may be lost.)  
Subject to interference noises from adjacent stations, but sound  
quality will not be degraded and the stereo effect will remain.  
3
*
Displayed only when “L/O MODE” is set to “WOOFER.”  
15  
Maintenance  
External component  
operations  
You can connect an external component to the AUX  
(auxiliary) input jack on the control panel.  
How to clean the connectors  
Frequent detachment will deteriorate the connectors.  
To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe the  
connectors with a cotton swab or cloth moistened with  
alcohol, being careful not to damage the connectors.  
Connector  
Moisture condensation  
Moisture may condense on the lens inside the unit in  
the following cases:  
• After starting the heater in the car.  
~
• If it becomes very humid inside the car.  
Should this occur, the unit may malfunction. In this  
case, eject the disc and leave the unit turned on for a  
few hours until the moisture evaporates.  
Ÿ Turn on the connected component and  
start playing the source.  
! Adjust the volume.  
How to handle discs  
When removing a disc from its  
case, press down the center holder  
of the case and lift the disc out,  
holding it by the edges.  
Center holder  
• Always hold the disc by the edges. Do not touch its  
recording surface.  
When storing a disc into its case, gently insert the  
disc around the center holder (with the printed surface  
facing up).  
Adjust the sound as you want. (See  
page 13.)  
To check other information while listening  
to an external component  
• Make sure to store discs into the cases after use.  
Clock Ô AUX IN  
16  
To keep discs clean  
More about this unit  
Basic operations  
A dirty disc may not play correctly.  
If a disc does become dirty, wipe it with  
a soft cloth in a straight line from center  
to edge.  
Turning on the power  
• Do not use any solvent (for example, conventional  
record cleaner, spray, thinner, benzine, etc.) to clean  
discs.  
• By pressing SRC on the unit, you can also turn on the  
power. If the source is ready, playback also starts.  
Turning off the power  
• If you turn off the power while listening to a track,  
playback starts from where playback it has been  
stopped previously, next time you turn on the power.  
To play new discs  
New discs may have some rough spots  
around the inner and outer edges. If  
such a disc is used, this unit may reject  
the disc.  
To remove these rough spots, rub the edges with a  
pencil or ball-point pen, etc.  
General  
• If you change the source while listening to a disc or  
an iPod, playback stops.  
Next time you select “CD” or “IPOD” as the playback  
source, playback starts from where it has been  
stopped/paused previously.  
• After ejecting a disc or disconnecting an iPod,  
“NO DISC” or “NO IPOD” appears and you cannot  
operate some of the buttons. Insert another disc,  
reconnect an iPod, or press SRC to select another  
playback source.  
Do not use the following discs:  
Warped disc  
Sticker  
Sticker residue  
Tuner operations  
Storing stations in memory  
• During SSM search...  
– All previously stored stations are erased and  
stations are stored newly.  
Stick-on label  
Unusual shape  
– Received stations are preset in No. 1 (lowest  
frequency) to No. 6 (highest frequency).  
– When SSM is over, the station stored in No. 1 will  
be automatically tuned in.  
Single CD—8 cm  
(3-3/16”) disc  
• When storing a station manually, the previously  
preset station is erased when a new station is stored  
in the same preset number.  
Continued on the next page  
17  
• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:  
– Discs with stickers, labels, or a protective seal stuck  
to the surface.  
– Discs on which labels can be directly printed by an  
ink jet printer.  
Using these discs under high temperatures or high  
humidities may cause malfunctions or damage to the  
unit.  
Disc operations  
Caution for DualDisc playback  
• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply  
with the “Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard.  
Therefore, the use of Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on  
this product may not be recommended.  
General  
• This unit has been designed to reproduce CDs/CD  
Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/CD-RWs (Rewritable)  
in audio CD (CD-DA), MP3 and WMA formats.  
• When a disc is inserted upside down, “PLEASE” and  
“EJECT” appear alternately on the display. Press 0 to  
eject the disc.  
• MP3 and WMA “tracks” (words “file” and “track” are  
used interchangeably) are recorded in “folders.”  
• While fast-forwarding or reversing on an MP3 or  
WMA disc, you can only hear intermittent sounds.  
Playing an MP3/WMA disc  
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files with the  
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> (regardless of  
the letter case—upper/lower).  
• This unit can show the names of albums, artists  
(performer), and Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or  
2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.  
• This unit can display only one-byte characters. No  
other characters can be correctly displayed.  
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the  
conditions below:  
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW  
– Bit rate: 8 kbps — 320 kbps  
• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.  
• This unit can play back only files of the same type  
which are first detected if a disc includes both audio  
CD (CD-DA) files and MP3/WMA files.  
• This unit can play back multi-session discs; however,  
unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.  
• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not play back on this  
unit because of their disc characteristics, or for the  
following reasons:  
– Sampling frequency:  
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)  
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)  
– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2, Romeo,  
Joliet, Windows long file name  
• The maximum number of characters for file/folder  
names vary among the disc format used (includes 4  
extension characters—<.mp3> or <.wma>).  
– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters  
– ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters  
– Romeo: up to 128 characters  
– Discs are dirty or scratched.  
– Moisture condensation occurs on the lens inside  
the unit.  
– Joliet: up to 64 characters  
– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.  
– CD-R/CD-RW on which the files are written with  
“Packet Write” method.  
– Windows long file name: up to 128 characters  
• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files, of 200  
folders, and of 8 hierarchies.  
– There are improper recording conditions (missing  
data, etc.) or media conditions (stained, scratched,  
warped, etc.).  
CD-RWs may require a longer readout time since the  
reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than that of regular CDs.  
• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR (variable  
bit rate).  
Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in elapsed  
time display, and do not show the actual elapsed  
time. Especially, after performing the search function,  
this difference becomes noticeable.  
18  
• This unit cannot play back the following files:  
– MP3 files encoded with MP3i and MP3 PRO format.  
– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.  
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.  
– WMA files encoded with lossless, professional, and  
voice format.  
• When you turn on this unit, the iPod is charged  
through this unit.  
• While the iPod is connected, all operations from the  
iPod are disabled. Perform all operations from this  
unit.  
• While connecting an iPod with Video:  
– No video shows on the iPod’s display or the  
external monitor (only the audio part is available).  
– It is not possible to browse video files on the  
“Video“ menu. (If you connect the iPod during  
playback or pausing of a video file, resuming  
playback will not work.)  
– WMA files which are not based upon Windows  
Media Audio.  
®
– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.  
– Files which have the data such as AIFF, ATRAC3, etc.  
• The search function works but search speed is not  
constant.  
• iPod shuffle is not controllable.  
• You can control the iPod from this unit when “JVC” or  
Ejecting a disc  
” appears on the iPod display.  
• If the ejected disc is not removed within 15 seconds,  
the disc is automatically inserted again into the  
loading slot to protect it from dust. Playback starts  
automatically.  
• The songs order displayed on the selecting menu of  
this unit may differ from the iPod.  
• If playback is stopped, select a track from the  
selecting menu or press .  
• The text information may not be displayed correctly.  
– Some characters such as accented letters cannot be  
shown correctly on the display.  
iPod operations  
Controllable iPod  
Software version  
– Depends on the condition of communication  
between the iPod and the unit.  
• If the text information includes more than 8  
characters, it scrolls on the display. This unit can  
display up to 40 characters.  
iPod with dock connector  
(3rd Generation)  
2.3 or later  
iPod with Click Wheel  
(4th Generation)  
3.1 or later  
iPod mini  
iPod photo  
iPod nano  
1.4 or later  
1.2 or later  
1.0 or later  
1.0 or later  
General settings—PSM  
• If you change the “AMP GAIN” setting from  
“HIGH PWR” to “LOW PWR” while the volume level  
is set higher than “VOL 30,” the unit automatically  
changes the volume level to “VOL 30.”  
iPod with Video  
(5th Generation)  
• If your iPod software version is older than those  
mentioned above, you may not be able to control the  
iPod properly. Update your iPod to the latest software  
version before using it with this unit.  
– You can check the software version of your iPod  
from “About” in the “Setting” menu of the iPod.  
– For details about updating your iPod, visit  
<http://www.apple.com>.  
19  
Hierarchical structure of file searching when an iPod is connected  
20  
Troubleshooting  
What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service center.  
Symptoms  
Remedies/Causes  
• Sound cannot be heard from the speakers.  
• Adjust the volume to the optimum level.  
• Check the cords and connections.  
• The unit does not work at all.  
Reset the unit (see page 3).  
Store stations manually.  
• SSM automatic presetting does not work.  
• Static noise while listening to the radio.  
• Disc cannot be played back.  
Connect the antenna firmly.  
Insert the disc correctly.  
• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played back.  
• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.  
• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot be skipped. • Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component which  
you used for recording.  
• Disc can neither be played back nor ejected. • Unlock the disc (see page 9).  
• Eject the disc forcibly (see page 3).  
• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted.  
• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.  
• Change the disc.  
• Check the cords and connections.  
• “NO DISC” appears on the display.  
• Disc cannot be played back.  
Insert a playable disc into the loading slot.  
• Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in the  
format compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1, Level 2,  
Romeo, or Joliet.  
• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to the  
file names.  
• Noise is generated.  
Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not add the  
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to non-MP3 or  
WMA tracks.)  
• A longer readout time is required (“CHECK”  
keeps flashing on the display).  
Do not use too many hierarchies and folders.  
Continued on the next page  
21  
Symptoms  
Remedies/Causes  
• Tracks do not play back in the order you have Playback order is determined when the files are recorded.  
intended them to play.  
Elapsed  
playing  
time  
is  
not  
correct.This  
the tracks are recorded on the disc.  
• “PLEASE” and “EJECT“ appear alternately on Insert a disc that contains MP3/WMA tracks.  
the display.  
• Correct characters are not displayed (e.g.  
album name).  
This unit can only display letters (upper case), numbers,  
and a limited number of symbols.  
The iPod does not turn on or does not work.•  
• Update the firmware version.  
Check the connectin  
Charge the battery.  
The  
sound  
is  
e and its connecthtieon.  
disto  
display.•  
“NO  
IPOD”  
Ch  
a
e
p
c
p
k
e
t
a
h
r
e
s
connecting cab  
oln  
• Charge the battery  
Playback  
stops.The  
off the unit’s power and turn it on again.  
h
• No sound can be heard when connecting an • Disconnect the headphones from the iPod nano.  
iPod nano.  
• Update the firmware version of the iPod nano.  
• “NO FILES” appears on the display.  
No tracks are stored. Import tracks to the iPod.  
“RESET 1”  
“RESET 7” appears on the display.Reconnect the iPod.  
• “RESET 8” appears on the display.  
Check the connecting cable and its connection  
Reset the iPod.  
• The iPod’s controls do not work after  
disconnecting from this unit.  
• Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the  
United States and/or other countries.  
• iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.  
22  
Specifications  
AUDIO AMPLIFIER SECTION  
CD PLAYER SECTION  
Power Output:  
Type:  
Compact disc player  
20 W RMS × 4 Channels at 4 Ω  
Signal Detection  
System:  
Non-contact optical pickup  
(semiconductor laser)  
and 1% THD+N  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio:  
80 dBA (reference: 1 W into 4 Ω)  
Number of Channels: 2 channels (stereo)  
Frequency Response: 5 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
Load Impedance:  
4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)  
Dynamic Range:  
96 dB  
Tone Control Range:  
Bass/Mid-range/Treble: 12 dB at 60 Hz/1 kHz/  
7.5 kHz  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 98 dB  
Wow and Flutter:  
Less than measurable limit  
Frequency Response:  
Line-Out Level/Impedance:  
KD-APD38: 4.0 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)  
KD-PDR30: 2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)  
Subwoofer-Out Level/Impedance:  
40 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
MP3 Decoding Format: (MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3)  
Max. Bit Rate:  
320 kbps  
WMA (Windows Media® Audio) Decoding Format:  
Max. Bit Rate:  
192 kbps  
KD-APD38: 4.0 V /20 kΩ load (full scale)  
KD-PDR30: 2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)  
GENERAL  
Power Requirement:  
Output Impedance:  
Other Terminal:  
1 kΩ  
Operating Voltage: DC 14.4 V  
(11 V to 16 V allowance)  
Negative ground  
Allowable Operating 0°C to +40°C  
Temperature: (32°F to 104°F)  
AUX (auxiliary) input jack, iPod jack, Steering wheel  
remote input (only for KD-APD38)  
Grounding System:  
TUNER SECTION  
Frequency Range:  
Dimensions (W × H × D): (approx.)  
FM: 87.5 MHz to 107.9 MHz  
Installation Size: 182 mm × 52 mm × 150 mm  
(7-3/16” × 2-1/16” × 5-15/16”)  
(with channel interval set to 100 kHz or 200 kHz)  
87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz  
(with channel interval set to 50 kHz)  
AM: 530 kHz to 1 710 kHz  
Panel Size:  
187 mm × 58 mm × 13 mm  
(7-3/8” × 2-5/16” × 9/16”)  
Mass:  
1.3 kg (2.9 lbs)  
(with channel interval set to 10 kHz)  
531 kHz to 1 602 kHz  
(excluding accessories)  
(with channel interval set to 9 kHz)  
Design and specifications are subject to change without  
notice.  
FM Tuner  
Usable Sensitivity:  
11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)  
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity: 16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)  
Alternate Channel  
Selectivity (400 kHz):  
Frequency Response:  
Stereo Separation:  
AM Tuner  
65 dB  
If a kit is necessary for your car, consult your  
telephone directory for the nearest car audio  
speciality shop.  
40 Hz to 15 000 Hz  
35 dB  
Sensitivity/Selectivity:  
20 μV/35 dB  
23  
Having TROUBLE with operation?  
Please reset your unit  
Refer to page of How to reset your unit  
Still having trouble??  
USA ONLY  
Call 1-800-252-5722  
http://www.jvc.com  
We can help you!  
EN, SP, FR  
© 2006 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
1206DTSMDTJEIN  
KD-APD38/KD-PDR30  
Installation/Connection Manual  
Manual de instalación/conexión  
Manuel d’installation/raccordement  
1206DTSMDTJEIN  
EN, SP, FR  
© 2006 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
GET0467-002A  
[J]  
ENGLISH  
ESPAÑOL  
FRANÇAIS  
This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground  
electrical systems. If your vehicle does not have this system, a  
voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC car audio este sistema, será necesario un inversor de tensión, que puede ser  
dealers.  
Esta unidad está diseñada para funcionar con 12 V de CC, con  
sistemas eléctricos de masa NEGATIVA. Si su vehículo no posee  
Cet appareil est conçu pour fonctionner sur des sources de courant  
continu de 12 V à masse NEGATIVE. Si votre véhicule n’offre pas ce  
type d’alimentation, il vous faut un convertisseur de tension, que vous  
pouvez acheter chez un revendeur d’autoradios JVC.  
adquirido en los concesionarios de JVC de equipos de audio para  
automóviles.  
WARNINGS  
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the  
battery’s negative terminal and make all electrical connections before  
installing the unit.  
ADVERTENCIAS  
AVERTISSEMENTS  
Para evitar cortocircuitos, recomendamos que desconecte el terminal Pour éviter tout court-circuit, nous vous recommandons de débrancher  
negativo de la batería y que efectúe todas las conexiones eléctricas  
antes de instalar la unidad.  
la borne négative de la batterie et d’effectuer tous les raccordements  
électriques avant d’installer l’appareil.  
Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after  
installation.  
Asegúrese de volver a conectar a masa esta unidad al chasis  
del automóvil después de la instalación.  
Assurez-vous de raccorder de nouveau la mise à la masse de  
cet appareil au châssis de la voiture après l’installation.  
Notes:  
Notas:  
Remarques:  
Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows  
frequently, consult your JVC car audio dealer.  
Reemplace el fusible por uno con la corriente especificada. Si el  
fusible se quemase frecuentemente consulte con su concesionario  
de JVC de equipos de audio para automóviles.  
Se recomienda conectar los altavoces con una potencia máxima  
de más de 50 W (tanto atrás como adelante, con una impedancia  
de 4 a 8 Ω). Si la potencia máxima es de menos de 50 W, cambie  
“AMP GAIN” para evitar daños en los altavoces (consulte la página 15  
del MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES).  
Para evitar cortocircuitos, cubra los cables NO UTILIZADOS con cinta  
aislante.  
El sumidero térmico estará muy caliente después del uso. Asegúrese  
de no tocarlo al desmontar esta unidad.  
Remplacer le fusible par un de la valeur précisée. Si le fusible saute  
souvent, consulter votre revendeur d’autoradios JVC.  
Il est recommandé de connecter des enceintes avec une puissance de  
plus de 50 W (les enceintes arrière et les enceintes avant, avec une  
impédance comprise entre 4 et 8 ). Si la puissance maximum est  
inférieure à 50 W, changez “AMP GAIN” pour éviter d’endommager  
vos enceintes (voir page 15 du MANUAL D’INSTRUCTIONS).  
Pour éviter les court-circuits, couvrir les bornes des fils qui ne sont  
PAS UTILISÉS avec de la bande isolante.  
It is recommended to connect to the speakers with maximum  
power of more than 50 W (both at the rear and at the front, with an  
impedance of 4 to 8 ). If the maximum power is less than 50 W,  
change “AMP GAIN” setting to prevent the speakers from being  
damaged (see page 15 of the INSTRUCTIONS).  
To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads  
with insulating tape.  
The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it  
when removing this unit.  
Le dissipateur de chaleur devient très chaud après usage. Faire  
attention de ne pas le toucher en retirant cet appareil.  
Heat sink  
Sumidero térmico  
Dissipateur de chaleur  
PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker  
connections:  
PRECAUCIONES sobre las conexiones de la  
fuente de alimentación y de los altavoces:  
PRECAUTIONS sur l’alimentation et la  
connexion des enceintes:  
DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the NO conecte los conductores de altavoz del cable de  
NE CONNECTEZ PAS les fils d’enceintes du cordon  
d’alimentation à la batterie; sinon, l’appareil serait  
sérieusement endommagé.  
AVANT de connecter les fils d’enceintes du cordon d’alimentation  
aux enceintes, vérifiez le câblage des enceintes de votre voiture.  
car battery; otherwise, the unit will be seriously damaged.  
BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the  
speakers, check the speaker wiring in your car.  
alimentación a la batería de automóvil, pues podrían  
producirse graves daños en la unidad.  
ANTES de conectar a los altavoces los conductores de altavoz del  
cable de alimentación, verifique el conexionado de altavoz de su  
automóvil.  
Parts list for installation and connection  
The following parts are provided for this unit. If any item is missing, Con esta unidad se suministran las siguientes piezas. Si hay algún  
consult your JVC car audio dealer immediately.  
Lista de piezas para instalación y conexión  
Liste des pièces pour l’installation et  
raccordement  
Les pièces suivantes sont fournies avec cet appareil. Si quelque chose  
elemento faltante, consulte inmediatamente con su concesionario de  
JVC de equipos de audio para automóviles.  
manquait, consultez votre revendeur autoradio JVC immédiatement.  
A / B  
E
C
D
Hard case/Control panel  
Estuche duro/Panel de control  
Etui de transport/Panneau de commande  
Power cord  
Cordón de alimentación  
Cordon d’alimentation  
Sleeve  
Cubierta  
Manchon  
Trim plate  
Placa de guarnición  
Plaque d’assemblage  
F
H
I
G
Connection cable for iPod  
Cable de conexión para iPod  
Câble de connexion pour iPod  
Washer (ø5)  
Arandela (ø5)  
Rondelle (ø5)  
Lock nut (M5)  
Tuerca de seguridad (M5)  
Ecrou d’arrêt (M5)  
Cable tie  
Sujetacables  
Collier pour câble  
J
K
L
M
N
Mounting bolt—M5 × 20 mm (M5 × 13/16")  
Perno de montaje—M5 × 20 mm  
(M5 × 13/16 pulgada)  
Boulon de montage—M5 × 20 mm  
(M5 × 13/16 pouces)  
Rubber cushion  
Cojín de goma  
Amortisseur en  
caoutchouc  
Handles  
Manijas  
Poignées  
Remote controller  
Control remoto  
Télécommande  
Battery  
Pila  
Pile  
1
INSTALLATION  
INSTALACION (MONTAJE EN EL  
TABLERO DE INSTRUMENTOS)  
INSTALLATION (MONTAGE  
DANS LE TABLEAU DE BORD)  
(IN-DASH MOUNTING)  
The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any La siguiente ilustración muestra una instalación típica. Si tiene alguna  
questions or require information regarding installation kits, consult  
your JVC car audio dealer or a company supplying kits.  
L’illustration suivante est un exemple d’installation typique. Si  
vous avez des questions ou avez besoin d’information sur des kits  
pregunta o necesita información acerca de las herramientas para  
instalación, consulte con su concesionario de JVC de equipos de audio d’installation, consulter votre revendeur d’autoradios JVC ou une  
If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed para automóviles o a una compañía que suministra tales herramientas. compagnie d’approvisionnement.  
by a qualified technician.  
Si usted no está seguro de cómo instalar correctamente la unidad,  
hágala instalar por un técnico cualificado.  
Si l’on n’est pas sûr de pouvoir installer correctement cet appareil, le  
faire installer par un technicien qualifié.  
Do the required electrical connections.  
Realice las conexiones eléctricas requeridas.  
Réalisez les connexions électriques.  
Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the  
sleeve firmly in place.  
Doble las lengüetas apropiadas para  
retener firmemente la manga en su lugar.  
Tordez les languettes appropriées pour  
maintenir le manchon en place.  
Removing the unit  
Extracción de la unidad  
Retrait de l’appareil  
Before removing the unit, release the rear section.  
Antes de extraer la unidad, libere la sección trasera.  
Avant de retirer l’appareil, libérer la section arrière.  
Insert the two handles, then pull them as  
illustrated so that the unit can be removed.  
Inserte las dos manijas y, a continuación,  
extráigalas de la manera indicada en la ilustración  
para poder desmontar la unidad.  
Insérez les deux poignées, puis tirez de la façon  
illustrée de façon à retirer l’appareil.  
When using the optional stay / Cuando emplea un  
soporte opcional / Lors de l’utilisation du hauban en  
When installing the unit without using the sleeve / Instalación de la unidad sin utilizar  
la cubierta / Lors de l’installation de l’appareil scans utiliser de manchon  
option  
In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.  
En un automóvil Toyota, por ejemplo, en primer lugar desmonte el autorradio e instale la unidad en su lugar.  
Dans une voiture Toyota, par exemple, retirez d’abord l’autoradio et installez l’appareil à sa place.  
Stay (option)  
Soporte (opción)  
Hauban (en option)  
Fire wall  
Tabique a prueba de incendios  
Cloison  
Flat type screws—M5 × 8 mm (M5 × 3/8")*2  
Tornillos tipo plano—M5 × 8 mm (M5 × 3/8 pulgada)*2  
Vis à tête plate—M5 × 8 mm (M5 × 3/8 pouces)*2  
Dashboard  
Tablero de instrumentos  
Tableau de bord  
Bracket*2  
Ménsula*2  
Support*2  
Screw (option)  
Tornillo (opción)  
Vis (en option)  
Flat type screws—M5 × 8 mm (M5 × 3/8")*2  
Tornillos tipo plano—M5 × 8 mm (M5 × 3/8 pulgada)*2  
Vis à tête plate—M5 × 8 mm (M5 × 3/8 pouces)*2  
Pocket  
Compartimiento  
Poche  
Bracket*2  
Ménsula*2  
Support*2  
Note  
Nota  
: When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm (3/8") -long screws. If longer  
screws are used, they could damage the unit.  
: Cuando instala la unidad en la ménsula de montaje, asegúrese de utilizar los tornillos de 8 mm (3/8 pulgada) de  
longitud. Si se utilizan tornillos más largos, éstos pueden dañar la unidad.  
Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚.  
Instale la unidad a un ángulo de menos de 30˚.  
Installez l’appareil avec un angle de moins de 30˚.  
Remarque : Lors de l’installation de l’appareil sur le support de montage, s’assurer d’utiliser des vis d’une longueur de 8 mm  
(3/8 pouces). Si des vis plus longues sont utilisées, elles peuvent endommager l’appareil.  
1
2
1
2
1
*
When you stand the unit, be careful not to damage the fuse on the  
rear.  
Not supplied for this unit.  
*
Al poner la unidad vertical, tenga cuidado de no dañar el fusible  
provisto en la parte posterior.  
No suministrado con esta unidad.  
*
Lorsque vous mettez l’appareil à la verticale, faire attention de ne pas  
endommager le fusible situé sur l’arrière.  
Non fourni avec cet appareil.  
2
*
*
*
2
ENGLISH  
ESPAÑOL  
FRANÇAIS  
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS  
CONEXIONES ELECTRICAS  
RACCORDEMENTS ELECTRIQUES  
A
Typical connections / Conexiones tipicas / Raccordements typiques  
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully.  
Incorrect connection may cause serious damage to this unit.  
The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car unidad.  
Antes de la conexión: Verifique atentamente el conexionado del  
vehículo. Una conexión incorrecta podría producir daños graves en la  
Avant de commencer la connexion: Vérifiez attentivement le  
câblage du véhicule. Une connexion incorrecte peut endommager  
sérieusement l’appareil.  
body may be different in color.  
Los cordones del cable de alimentación y los del conector procedentes Le fil du cordon d’alimentation et ceux des connecteurs du châssis de  
de la carrocería del automóvil podrían ser de diferentes en color.  
la voiture peuvent être différents en couleur.  
1 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order  
specified in the illustration below.  
1 Conecte los conductores de color del cable de alimentación en el  
1 Connectez les fils colorés du cordon d’alimentation dans l’ordre  
orden especificado en la ilustración de abajo.  
spécifié sur l’illustration ci-dessous.  
2 Connect the antenna cord.  
3 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.  
2 Conecte el cable de antena.  
3 Por último, conecte el cable de alimentación a la unidad.  
2 Connectez le cordon d’antenne.  
3 Finalement, connectez le faisceau de fils à l’appareil.  
To steering wheel remote controller (see diagram )—only for KD-APD38  
Al control remoto del volante de dirección (véase diagrama )—sólo para KD-APD38  
Pour la télécommande de volant (voir le diagramme )—seulement pour le KD-APD38  
Loop (see diagram  
Lazo (véase diagrama  
)
)
Rear ground terminal  
Terminal de tierra  
posterior  
Boucle (voir le diagramme  
)
Borne arrière de masse  
15 A fuse  
Fusible de 15 A  
Fusible 15 A  
Antenna terminal  
Terminal de la antena  
Borne de l’antenne  
iPod jack  
(see diagram  
Jack del iPod  
)
Ignition switch  
(véase diagrama  
)
Interruptor de encendido  
Interrupteur d’allumage  
Prise iPod  
(voir le diagramme  
Black  
Negro  
)
To metallic body or chassis of the car  
A un cuerpo metálico o chasis del automóvil  
Vers corps métallique ou châssis de la voiture  
Noir  
Line out (see diagram  
Salida de línea (véase diagrama  
Sortie de ligne (voir le diagramme  
)
)
)
Yellow*2  
Amarillo*2  
Jaune*2  
To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery  
(bypassing the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)  
A un terminal activo del bloque de fusibles conectado a la batería del  
automóvil (desviando el interruptor de encendido) (12 V constantes)  
A une borne sous tension du porte-fusible connectée à la batterie de la  
voiture (en dérivant l’interrupteur d’allumage) (12 V constant)  
Red  
Rojo  
To an accessory terminal in the fuse block  
A un terminal accesorio del bloque de fusibles  
Vers borne accessoire du porte-fusible  
Fuse block  
Bloque de fusibles  
Porte-fusible  
Rouge  
Blue with white stripe  
Azul con rayas blancas  
Bleu avec bande blanche  
To the remote lead of other equipment or automatic antenna if any (200 mA max.)  
Al conductor remoto de otro equipo o de la antena automática, si hubiere (máx. 200 mA)  
Au fil de télécommande de l’autre appareil ou à l’antenne automatique s’il y en a une  
(200 mA max.)  
White with black stripe  
Blanco con rayas negras  
Blanc avec bande noire  
White  
Blanco  
Blanc  
Gray with black stripe  
Gris con rayas negras  
Gris avec bande noire  
Gray  
Gris  
Gris  
Green with black stripe  
Verde con rayas negras  
Vert avec bande noire  
Green  
Verde  
Vert  
Purple with black stripe  
Púrpura con rayas negras  
Violet avec bande noire  
Purple  
Púrpura  
Violet  
Left speaker (front)  
Altavoz izquierdo (frontal)  
Right speaker (front)  
Altavoz derecho (frontal)  
Left speaker (rear)  
Altavoz izquierdo (trasero)  
Right speaker (rear)  
Altavoz derecho (trasero)  
Enceinte gauche (avant)  
Enceinte droit (avant)  
Enceinte gauche (arrière)  
Enceinte droit (arrière)  
B
Connecting to the steering wheel remote controller (only for KD-APD38) / Conexión al control remoto del volante de dirección (sólo para  
KD-APD38) / Connexion de la télécommande de volant (seulement pour le KD-APD38)  
If your car is equipped with the steering wheel remote controller,  
you can operate this unit using the controller. For connection, an  
exclusive remote adapter (not supplied) which matches your car is  
required. For details, consult the same car audio dealer as where the  
unit is purchased.  
Si votre voiture est équipée d’une télécommande de volant, vous  
pouvez commander cet autoradio en utilisant cette télécommande.  
Pour la connexion, vous avez besoin d’un adaptateur de  
télécommande spécialisé (non fourni) correspondant à votre voiture.  
Pour en savoir plus, consultez le revendeur autoradio où vous avez  
acheté votre autoradio.  
Si su automóvil está equipado con control remoto en el volante de  
dirección, podrá controlar este receptor utilizando el control remoto.  
Para la conexión, se requiere un adaptador remoto exclusivo (no  
suministrado) que sea adecuado para su automóvil. Para los detalles,  
consulte con el concesionario car audio donde compró el receptor.  
Remote adapter*1  
Steering wheel remote input  
Entrada del control remoto del volante de dirección  
Entrée de la télécommande de volant  
Adaptador para remoto exclusivo*1  
Adaptateur pour télécommande spécialisé*1  
Steering wheel remote controller (equipped in the car)  
Control remoto del volante de dirección (equipado en el vehículo)  
Télécommande de volant (installée dans la voiture)  
1
2
1
1
*
*
Not supplied for this unit.  
Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this  
lead must be connected, otherwise power cannot be turned on.  
*
*
No suministrado con esta unidad.  
*
*
Non fourni avec cet appareil.  
Pour vérifier le fonctionnement de cet appareil avant installation, ce fil  
doit être raccordé, sinon l’appareil ne peut pas être mis sous tension.  
2
2
Antes de comprobar el funcionamiento de esta unidad previa a de  
la instalación, es necesario conectar este cable, de lo contrario no se  
podrá conectar la alimentación.  
3
Connecting the external amplifiers and/or subwoofer Conexión de los amplificadores y/o subwoofer externos Connexion  
d’amplificateurs extérieurs et/ou d’un caisson de grave  
C
/
/
Vous pouvez connecter des amplificateurs pour améliorer votre  
système autoradio.  
Connectez le fil de commande à distance (bleu avec bande blanche)  
au fil de commande à distance de l’autre appareil de façon qu’il  
puisse être commandé via cet appareil.  
You can connect amplifiers to upgrade your car stereo system.  
Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote  
lead of the other equipment so that it can be controlled through  
this unit.  
Usted podrá conectar amplificadores para mejorar el sistema estéreo  
de su automóvil.  
Conecte el conductor remoto (azul con rayas blancas) al conductor  
remoto del otro equipo para poderlo controlar a través de esta unidad.  
Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the Desconecte los altavoces de esta unidad y conéctelos al  
Déconnectez les enceintes de cet appareil et connectez-les  
à l’amplificateur. Laissez les fils d’enceintes de cet appareil  
inutilisés.  
Pour le KD-APD38: Le niveau de sortie de ligne de cet appareil est  
maintenu à un niveau élevé pour maintenir une qualité Hi-Fi pour  
les sons reproduits par cet appareil.  
Lors de la connexion d’un amplificateur extérieur à cet appareil,  
diminuez le réglage du gain sur l’amplificateur extérieur pour  
obtenir les meilleures performances de cet appareil.  
amplifier. Leave the speaker leads of this unit unused.  
For KD-APD38: The line output level of this unit is kept high to  
maintain the hi-fi sounds reproduced from this unit.  
When connecting an external amplifier to this unit, turn down  
the gain control on the external amplifier to obtain the best  
performance from this unit.  
amplificador. Los cables de los altavoces de esta unidad  
quedan sin usar.  
Para KD-APD38: El nivel de salida de línea de esta unidad permanece  
alto para que corresponda con los sonidos de alta fidelidad  
reproducidos por esta unidad.  
Cuando conecte un amplificador externo a esta unidad, disminuya  
el control de ganancia del amplificador externo para obtener un  
óptimo rendimiento de esta unidad.  
Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)  
Conector en Y (no suministrado con esta unidad)  
Connecteur Y (non fourni avec cet appareil)  
Front speakers  
Altavoces delanteros  
Enceintes avant  
JVC Amplifier  
Amplificador de JVC  
JVC Amplificateur  
Remote lead (blue with white stripe)  
Cable remoto (azul con rayas blancas)  
Fil d’alimentation à distance (bleu  
avec bande blanche)  
Set “L/O MODE” to “WOOFER” (See page  
15 of the INSTRUCTIONS.)  
Ajuste “L/O MODE” a “WOOFER”  
(Consulte la página 15 del MANUAL DE  
INSTRUCCIONES.)  
Réglez “L/O MODE” sur “WOOFER” (Voir  
page 15 du MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS.)  
Set “L/O MODE” to “REAR” (See page 15  
of the INSTRUCTIONS.)  
Ajuste “L/O MODE” a “REAR” (Consulte  
la página 15 del MANUAL DE  
INSTRUCCIONES.)  
Réglez “L/O MODE” sur “REAR” (Voir  
page 15 du MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS.)  
To the remote lead of other equipment or  
automatic antenna if any  
Al conductor remoto de otro equipo o de  
la antena automática, si hubiere  
Au fil de télécommande de l’autre appareil  
ou à l’antenne automatique s’il y en a une  
or  
o
ou  
Subwoofer  
Subwoofer  
Caisson de grave  
Rear speakers  
Altavoces posteriores  
Enceintes arrière  
JVC Amplifier  
Amplificador de JVC  
JVC Amplificateur  
JVC Amplifier  
Amplificador de JVC  
JVC Amplificateur  
Front speakers  
Altavoces delanteros  
Enceintes avant  
Connecting an Apple iPod / Conexión del Apple iPod / Connexion d’un iPod Apple  
D
You can connect an iPod to this unit using the supplied connection cable for iPod.  
1 Insert the supplied cable tie across the loop.  
2 Press in the head of the connection cable for iPod until you hear a clicking sound.  
3 Fasten the connection cable using the cable tie to firmly hold the connection cable in place.  
Puede conectar el iPod a esta unidad mediante el cable de conexión de iPod suministrado.  
1 Inserte el sujetacables suministrado a través del lazo.  
Apple iPod (separately purchased)  
Apple iPod (adquirido separadamente)  
iPod Apple (vendu séparément)  
Cable tie  
Sujetacables  
Collier pour câble  
2 Presione la cabeza del cable de conexión para iPod hasta escuchar un chasquido.  
3 Sujete el cable de conexión utilizando el sujetacables de manera que quede firmemente  
retenido en su lugar.  
Vous pouvez connecter un iPod à cet appareil en utilisant le câble de connexion du iPod fourni.  
1 Insérez le collier pour câble fourni dans la boucle.  
2 Faite pression sur la tête du câble de connexion pour iPod jusqu’à ce que vous entendiez un déclic.  
3 Fixez le câble de connexion en utilisant le collier pour câble pour le maintenir solidement le câble  
de connexion en place.  
Connection cable for iPod (supplied)  
Cable de conexión para iPod (suministrado)  
Câble de connexion pour iPod (fourni)  
iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.  
iPod es una marca comercial de Apple Computer, Inc., registrada en los EE.UU. y otros países.  
iPod est une marque de commerce d’Apple Computer, Inc., enregistrée aux États-Unis et dans les autres pays.  
Loop  
Lazo  
Boucle  
3
3
3
*
Attachez solidement le fil de mise à la masse au châssis métallique de  
la voiture—à un endroit qui n’est pas recouvert de peinture (s’il est  
recouvert de peinture, enlevez d’abord la peinture avant d’attacher le fil).  
L’appareil peut être endommagé si cela n’est pas fait correctement.  
Fil d’alimentation à distance  
*
Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of  
the car—to the place uncoated with paint (if coated with paint, remove  
the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause damage  
to the unit.  
Remote lead  
Signal cord (not supplied for this unit).  
*
Fije firmemente el cable de tierra a la carrocería metálica o al chasis—a  
un lugar no cubierto con pintura (si está cubierto con pintura, quítela  
antes de fijar el cable). De lo contrario, se podrían producir daños en la  
unidad.  
Cable remoto  
Cable de señal (no suministrado con esta unidad).  
4
5
4
5
4
5
*
*
*
*
*
*
Cordon de signal (non fourni avec cet appareil).  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
The fuse blows.  
LOCALIZACION DE AVERIAS  
El fusible se quema.  
EN CAS DE DIFFICULTES  
Le fusible saute.  
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?  
* ¿Están los conductores rojo y negro correctamente conectados?  
* Les fils rouge et noir sont-ils racordés correctement?  
Power cannot be turned on.  
No es posible conectar la alimentación.  
L’appareil ne peut pas être mise sous tension.  
* Is the yellow lead connected?  
* ¿Está el cable amarillo conectado?  
* Le fil jaune est-elle raccordée?  
No sound from the speakers.  
No sale sonido de los altavoces.  
Pas de son des enceintes.  
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?  
* ¿Está el cable de salida del altavoz cortocircuitado?  
* Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il court-circuité?  
Sound is distorted.  
El sonido presenta distorsión.  
Le son est déformé.  
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?  
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?  
* ¿Está el cable de salida del altavoz conectado a masa?  
* ¿Están los terminales “–” de los altavoces L y R conectados a una  
masa común?  
* Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il à la masse?  
* Les bornes “–” des enceintes gauche et droit sont-elles mises ensemble  
à la masse?  
Noise interfere with sounds.  
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using  
shorter and thicker cords?  
Perturbación de ruido.  
* ¿El terminal de tierra trasero está conectado al chasis del automóvil  
utilizando los cordones más corto y más grueso?  
Interférence avec les sons.  
* La prise arrière de mise à la terre est-elle connectée au châssis de la  
voiture avec un cordon court et épais?  
This unit becomes hot.  
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?  
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?  
Esta unidad se calienta.  
Cet appareil devient chaud.  
* ¿Está el cable de salida del altavoz conectado a masa?  
* ¿Están los terminales “–” de los altavoces L y R conectados a una  
masa común?  
* Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il à la masse?  
* Les bornes “–” des enceintes gauche et droit sont-elles mises ensemble  
à la masse?  
This unit does not work at all.  
* Have you reset your unit?  
Esta unidad no funciona en absoluto.  
Cet appareil ne fonctionne pas du tout.  
* ¿Reinicializó la unidad?  
* Avez-vous réinitialisé votre appareil?  
4
CD RECEIVER  
RÉCEPTEUR CD  
KD-PDR31  
For canceling the display demonstration, see page 6.  
Pour annuler la démonstration des affichages, référez-vous à la page 6.  
For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.  
Pour l’installation et les raccordements, se référer au manuel séparé.  
INSTRUCTIONS  
MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS  
GET0469-003A  
[EX/EU]  
Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.  
Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to obtain the best  
possible performance from the unit.  
IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS  
1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT  
2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to  
qualified service personnel.  
3. CAUTION: Visible and/or invisible class 1M laser radiation when open. Do not view directly with optical  
instruments.  
4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.  
How to reset your unit  
Warning:  
If you need to operate the unit while driving, be  
sure to look ahead carefully or you may be involved  
in a traffic accident.  
This symbol is only valid in  
the European Union.  
Your preset adjustments will also be erased.  
How to forcibly eject a disc  
Information for Users on Disposal of Old  
Equipment  
This symbol indicates that the product with  
this symbol should not be disposed as general  
household waste at its end-of-life. If you wish to  
dispose of this product, please do so in accordance  
with applicable national legislation or other rules in  
your country and municipality. By disposing of this  
product correctly, you will help to conserve natural  
resources and will help prevent potential negative  
effects on the environment and human health.  
Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.  
If this does not work, reset your unit.  
2
How to use the M MODE button  
CONTENTS  
If you press M MODE, the unit goes into functions mode,  
then the number buttons and 5/buttons work as  
different function buttons.  
Control panel ..................................  
Remote controller — RM-RK50 .............  
4
5
Ex.: When number button 2 works as  
MO (monaural) button.  
Getting started................................  
Basic operations...................................................  
6
6
Radio operations .............................  
7
FM RDS operations...........................  
Searching for your favorite FM RDS programme....  
8
8
To use these buttons for their original functions  
again after pressing M MODE, wait for 5 seconds  
without pressing any of these buttons until the  
functions mode is cleared or press M MODE again.  
Disc operations................................ 10  
Playing a disc in the unit ..................................... 10  
iPod operations ............................... 12  
Sound adjustments.......................... 14  
General settings — PSM .................. 15  
External component operations ....... 18  
More about this unit ........................ 18  
Maintenance ................................... 22  
Troubleshooting.............................. 23  
Specifications.................................. 25  
Detaching the control panel  
Attaching the control panel  
Caution on volume setting:  
Note: Only for [EX] model users in UK and  
European countries  
For security reasons, a numbered ID card is provided  
with this unit, and the same ID number is imprinted on  
the unit’s chassis. Keep the card in a safe place, as it will  
help the authorities to identify your unit if stolen.  
For safety...  
Discs produce very little noise compared with other  
sources. Lower the volume before playing a disc  
to avoid damaging the speakers by the sudden  
increase of the output level.  
• Do not raise the volume level too much, as this will  
block outside sounds, making driving dangerous.  
• Stop the car before performing any complicated  
operations.  
Temperature inside the car...  
If you have parked the car for a long time in hot or cold  
weather, wait until the temperature in the car becomes  
normal before operating the unit.  
3
Control panel  
Parts identification  
Display window  
1
Control dial  
;
a
s
d
RND (random) button  
M MODE button  
(control panel release) button  
Disc information indicators—  
TAG (Tag information), (track/file), (folder)  
DISC indicator  
Playback mode / item indicators—RND (random),  
(disc), (folder), RPT (repeat)  
RDS indicators—AF, REG, TP, PTY  
Tuner reception indicators—MO (monaural),  
ST (stereo)  
S.BASS (super bass) indicator  
EQ (equalizer) indicator  
Tr (track) indicator  
Source display / Time countdown indicator  
Main display  
Sound mode (iEQ: intelligent equalizer)  
indicators—JAZZ, ROCK, HIP HOP, CLASSIC, POPS,  
USER  
2 0 (eject) button  
3
4
5
Loading slot  
T/P (traffic programme/programme type) button  
DISP (display) button  
6 4 /¢ buttons  
f
g
7
8
9
Display window  
(standby/on attenuator) button  
AUX (auxiliary) input jack  
h
j
p 5 (up) / (down) buttons  
q
w
e
r
SEL (select) button  
BAND button  
SRC (source) button  
Remote sensor  
DO NOT expose the remote sensor to strong light  
(direct sunlight or artificial lighting).  
EQ (equalizer) button  
MO (monaural) button  
SSM (Strong-station Sequential Memory) button  
Number buttons  
k
l
/
z
x
c
t
y
u
i
o
RPT (repeat) button  
4
Main elements and features  
Remote controller —  
RM-RK50  
Installing the lithium coin battery  
(CR2025)  
1
(standby/on/attenuator) button  
• Turns the power on if pressed briefly or  
attenuates the sound when the power is on.  
• Turns the power off if pressed and held.  
Aim the remote controller directly at the remote  
sensor on the unit. Make sure there is no obstacle  
in between.  
2 5 U (up) / D (down) buttons  
• Changes the FM/AM bands with 5 U.  
• Changes the preset stations with D .  
• Changes the folder of the MP3/WMA discs.  
• While listening to an Apple iPod:  
– Pauses or resumes playback with D .  
– Enters the main menu with 5 U.  
(Now 5 U/D /2 R/F 3 work as the menu  
selecting buttons.)*  
Warning:  
• Do not install any battery other than CR2025 or  
its equivalent; otherwise, it may explode.  
• Do not leave the remote controller in a place  
(such as dashboards) exposed to direct sunlight  
for a long time; otherwise, it may explode.  
• Store the battery in a place where children  
cannot reach to avoid risk of accident.  
• To prevent the battery from over-heating,  
cracking, or starting a fire:  
– Do not recharge, short, disassemble, heat the  
battery, or dispose of it in a fire.  
– Do not leave the battery with other metallic  
materials.  
3
4
5
VOL – / VOL + buttons  
• Adjusts the volume level.  
SOUND button  
Selects the sound mode (iEQ: intelligent equalizer).  
SOURCE button  
• Selects the source.  
6 2 R (reverse) / F (forward) 3 buttons  
• Searches for stations if pressed briefly.  
• Fast-forwards or reverses the track if pressed and  
held.  
– Do not poke the battery with tweezers or similar  
tools.  
– Wrap the battery with tape and insulate when  
throwing away or saving it.  
• Changes the tracks if pressed briefly.  
• While listening to an iPod (in menu selecting  
mode):  
– Selects an item if pressed briefly. (Then, press  
D to confirm the selection.)  
– Skips 10 items at a time if pressed and held.  
This unit is equipped with the steering wheel  
remote control function.  
• See the Installation/Connection Manual (separate  
volume) for connection.  
* 5 U : Returns to the previous menu.  
D : Confirms the selection.  
5
Basic settings  
Getting started  
• See also “General settings — PSM” on pages  
15 – 17.  
Basic operations  
~ Turn on the power.  
1
2
Ÿ
1
2
Canceling the display demonstrations  
Select “DEMO,” then “DEMO OFF.”  
Setting the clock  
Select “CLOCK H” (hour), then adjust the hour.  
Select “CLOCK M” (minute), then adjust the  
minute.  
Select “24H/12H,” then “24H” (hour) or “12H”  
(hour).  
1
*
You cannot select “CD” as the playback source  
if there is no disc in the unit.  
“NO IPOD” appears if iPod is not connected.  
2
*
! For FM/AM tuner  
3
Finish the procedure.  
Adjust the volume.  
To check the current clock time while the  
power is turned off  
Clock time is shown on the  
display for about 5 seconds. See  
also page 16.  
VOL 20  
Volume level appears.  
@ Adjust the sound as you want. (See  
pages 14 and 15.)  
To drop the volume in  
a moment (ATT)  
To restore the sound, press  
the button again.  
To turn off the power  
6
When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to  
receive  
Radio operations  
~
Lights up when monaural mode is activated.  
Ÿ
Lights up when receiving an FM stereo  
broadcast with sufficient signal strength.  
MONO  
Reception improves, but stereo effect will be lost.  
88.3  
To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same  
procedure. “MONO OFF” appears and the MO indicator  
goes off.  
! Start searching for a station.  
Storing stations in memory  
When a station is received, searching stops.  
To stop searching, press the same button  
again.  
You can preset six stations for each band.  
FM station automatic presetting—  
SSM (Strong-station Sequential  
Memory)  
To tune in to a station manually  
In step ! above...  
1
1
Select the FM band (FM1 – FM3) you want to  
store into.  
2
3
92.5  
M
2
Select a desired station frequency.  
SSM  
“SSM” flashes, then disappears when automatic  
presetting is over.  
Local FM stations with the strongest signals are  
searched and stored automatically in the FM band.  
7
Manual presetting  
Ex.: Storing FM station of 92.5 MHz into preset  
number 4 of the FM1 band.  
FM RDS operations  
What you can do with RDS  
RDS (Radio Data System) allows FM stations to send an  
additional signal along with their regular programme  
signals.  
1
By receiving the RDS data, this unit can do the  
following:  
• Programme Type (PTY) Search (see the following)  
• TA (Traffic Announcement) and PTY Standby  
Receptions (see pages 9 and 16)  
• Tracing the same programme automatically  
—Network-Tracking Reception (see page 10)  
• Programme Search (see pages 10 and 16)  
2
FM I 92.5  
3
P4  
92.5  
Preset number flashes for a while.  
Searching for your favorite  
FM RDS programme  
You can tune in to a station broadcasting your favorite  
programme by searching for a PTY code.  
Listening to a preset station  
1
2
• To store your favorite programme types, see page 9.  
Select the preset station (1 – 6) you want.  
~
The last selected PTY code  
appears.  
Ÿ Select one of your favorite programme  
or  
types.  
or  
Select one of the PTY codes (see page  
10).  
To check the current clock time while  
listening to an FM (non-RDS) or AM station  
• For FM RDS stations, see page 10.  
Frequency Ô Clock  
8
! Start searching for your favorite  
Using the standby receptions  
TA Standby Reception  
programme.  
TA Standby Reception allows the unit to switch  
temporarily to Traffic Announcement (TA) from any  
source other than AM.  
If there is a station broadcasting a programme  
of the same PTY code as you have selected, that  
station is tuned in.  
The volume changes to the preset TA volume level if the  
current level is lower than the preset level (see page  
16).  
To activate TA Standby Reception  
The TP (Traffic Programme) indicator  
either lights up or flashes.  
Storing your favorite programme  
types  
• If the TP indicator lights up, TA Standby Reception is  
activated.  
You can store six favorite programme types.  
• If the TP indicator flashes, TA Standby Reception is  
not yet activated. (This occurs when you are listening  
to an FM station without the RDS signals required for  
TA Standby Reception.)  
Preset programme types in the number buttons  
(1 to 6):  
To activate TA Standby Reception, tune in to another  
station providing these signals. The TP indicator will  
stop flashing and remain lit.  
1
2
Select a PTY code (see steps ~ to ! on  
pages 8 and 9).  
To deactivate the TA Standby Reception  
Select the preset number (1 – 6) you want to  
store into.  
The TP indicator goes off.  
PTY Standby Reception  
PTY Standby Reception allows the unit to switch  
temporarily to your favorite PTY programme from any  
source other than AM.  
To activate and select your favorite PTY code for  
PTY Standby Reception, see page 16.  
The PTY indicator either lights up or flashes.  
• If the PTY indicator lights up, PTY Standby Reception  
is activated.  
Ex.: When “ROCK M” is selected  
3
4
Repeat steps 1 and 2 to store other PTY codes  
into other preset numbers.  
• If the PTY indicator flashes, PTY Standby Reception is  
not yet activated.  
Finish the procedure.  
To activate PTY Standby Reception, tune in to another  
station providing these signals. The PTY indicator will  
stop flashing and remain lit.  
Continued on the next page  
9
To deactivate the PTY Standby Reception, select  
“OFF” for the PTY code (see page 16). The PTY indicator  
goes off.  
To check the current clock time while  
listening to an FM RDS station  
Station name (PS) = Station  
Frequency = Programme  
type (PTY) = Clock = (back to  
the beginning)  
Tracing the same programme—  
Network-Tracking Reception  
When driving in an area where FM reception is not  
sufficient enough, this unit automatically tunes in to  
another FM RDS station of the same network, possibly  
broadcasting the same programme with stronger  
signals (see the illustration below).  
PTY codes  
NEWS, AFFAIRS, INFO, SPORT, EDUCATE, DRAMA,  
CULTURE, SCIENCE, VARIED, POP M (music), ROCK  
M (music), EASY M (music), LIGHT M (music),  
CLASSICS, OTHER M (music), WEATHER, FINANCE,  
CHILDREN, SOCIAL, RELIGION, PHONE IN, TRAVEL,  
LEISURE, JAZZ, COUNTRY, NATION M (music),  
OLDIES, FOLK M (music), DOCUMENT  
When shipped from the factory, Network-Tracking  
Reception is activated.  
To change the Network-Tracking Reception  
setting, see “AF-REG” on page 16.  
Programme A broadcasting on different frequency areas  
(01 – 05)  
Disc operations  
Playing a disc in the unit  
All tracks will be played repeatedly until you change the  
source or eject the disc.  
Automatic station selection—  
Programme Search  
Usually when you press the number buttons, the preset  
station is tuned in.  
To stop play and eject the disc  
If the signals from the FM RDS preset station are not  
sufficient for good reception, this unit, using the AF  
data, tunes in to another frequency broadcasting the  
same programme as the original preset station is  
broadcasting.  
• Press SRC to listen to another  
playback source.  
• The unit takes some time to tune in to another  
station using programme search.  
• See also page 16.  
10  
To fast-forward or reverse the track  
To go to the next or previous tracks  
Other main functions  
Skipping tracks quickly during play  
• For MP3 or WMA discs, you can skip tracks within the  
same folder.  
Ex.: To select track 32 while playing tracks whose  
number is a single digit (1 to 9)  
1
2
To go to the next or previous folders (only for  
MP3 or WMA discs)  
Each time you press the button, you can skip 10  
tracks.  
• After the last track, the first track will be selected  
and vice versa.  
To locate a particular track (for CD) or folder  
(for MP3 or WMA discs) directly  
To select a number from 01 – 06:  
3
To select a number from 07 – 12:  
Prohibiting disc ejection  
You can lock a disc in the loading slot.  
• To use direct folder access on MP3/WMA discs, it  
is required that folders are assigned with 2-digit  
numbers at the beginning of their folder names—  
01, 02, 03, and so on.  
NO EJECT  
To select a particular track in a folder  
(for MP3 or WMA disc):  
To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same  
procedure.  
11  
Changing the display information  
Selecting the playback modes  
You can use only one of the following playback modes  
at a time.  
While playing an audio CD or a  
CD Text  
1
2
Select your desired playback mode.  
Repeat play  
Mode Plays repeatedly  
7
While playing an MP3 or a WMA track  
When “TAG DISP” is set to “TAG ON”  
(see page 17)  
TRK RPT : The current track.  
FLDR RPT * : All tracks of the current folder.  
RPT OFF : Cancels.  
7
Random play  
When “TAG DISP” is set to “TAG OFF”  
Mode Plays at random  
FLDR RND *: All tracks of the current folder, then  
tracks of the next folder and so on.  
DISC RND : All tracks of the current disc.  
: Elapsed playing time with the current  
track number  
: Clock with the current track number  
: Corresponding indicator lights up on the  
display  
RND OFF : Cancels.  
* Only while playing an MP3 or a WMA disc.  
: Corresponding indicator lights up on  
the display  
1
2
*
*
If the current disc is an audio CD, “NO NAME” appears.  
If an MP3/WMA file does not have Tag information,  
folder name and file name appear. In this case, the  
TAG indicator will not light up.  
iPod operations  
You can play songs from an Apple iPod through this unit  
by connecting it with the supplied connection cable for  
iPod.  
• Disconnecting the iPod will stop playback. Press SRC  
to listen to another playback source.  
12  
• For connection, see Installation/Connection Manual  
(separate volume).  
• For details, refer also to the manual supplied with  
your iPod.  
To fast-forward or reverse the track  
To go to the next or previous tracks  
~ Connect an iPod.  
Connection cable for iPod  
Selecting a track from the menu  
1
2
Enter the main menu.  
If an iPod has been connected...  
Now the 5//4 /¢ buttons work as  
the menu selecting buttons*.  
Playback starts automatically from where it has  
been paused previously.  
Select the desired menu.  
Ÿ Adjust the volume.  
PLAYLIST Ô ARTISTS Ô ALBUMS Ô  
SONGS Ô GENRES Ô COMPOSER Ô  
(back to the beginning)  
3
Confirm the selection.  
! Adjust the sound as you want. (See  
pages 14 and 15.)  
To move back to the previous menu,  
press 5.  
Caution:  
• If a track is selected, playback starts  
automatically.  
• Avoid using the iPod if it might hinder your safety  
driving.  
• Make sure all important data has been backed up  
to avoid losing the data.  
• If the selected item has another layer, you will  
enter the layer. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until the  
desired track is played (see page 21).  
• Holding 4 /¢ can skip 10 items at a  
time.  
To pause playback  
To resume playback, press the  
button again.  
* The menu selecting mode will be canceled:  
If no operations are done for about 5 seconds.  
When you confirm the selection of a track.  
13  
Selecting the playback modes  
Sound adjustments  
1
2
You can select a preset sound mode suitable to the  
music genre (iEQ: intelligent equalizer).  
Select your desired playback mode.  
1
2
7
Repeat play  
Mode  
Playback functions (as on iPod)  
ONE RPT : Same as “Repeat One.”  
Preset values  
BAS*1 MID*2 TRE*3 S.BS*4  
Indication (For)  
ALL RPT  
RPT OFF  
: Same as “Repeat All.”  
: Cancels.  
7
Random play  
USER  
00  
00  
00 OFF  
(Flat sound)  
ROCK  
(Rock or disco music)  
Mode  
Playback functions (as on iPod)  
+03 00 +02 ON  
+01 00 +03 OFF  
+02 +01 +02 OFF  
+04 –02 +01 ON  
+03 00 +03 OFF  
ALBM RND *: Same as “Shuffle Albums.”  
CLASSIC  
(Classical music)  
SONG RND : Same as “Shuffle Songs.”  
RND OFF : Cancels.  
POPS  
(Light music)  
* Functions only if you select “ALL” in “ALBUMS” of  
the main “MENU.”  
HIP HOP  
(Funk or rap music)  
: Corresponding indicator lights up  
on the display  
JAZZ  
(Jazz music)  
To check other information while listening  
to an iPod  
*1 : Bass; *2 : Mid-range; *3 : Treble; *4 : Super bass  
Adjusting the sound  
You can adjust the sound characteristics to your  
preference.  
1
2
14  
Indication, [Range]  
General settings — PSM  
BAS *1 (bass), [–06 to +06]  
Adjust the bass.  
MID *1 (mid-range), [–06 to +06]  
You can change PSM (Preferred Setting Mode) items  
listed in the table that follows.  
Adjust the mid-range frequencies sound level.  
TRE *1 (treble), [–06 to +06]  
1
Adjust the treble.  
FAD *2 (fader), [R06 to F06]  
Adjust the front and rear speaker balance.  
2
Select a PSM item.  
BAL (balance), [L06 to R06]  
Adjust the left and right speaker balance.  
S.BS *1 (super bass), [S.BS ON or S.BS OFF],  
[01 to 05, initial: 03]*3  
3
Adjust the PSM item selected.  
Maintain the richness and fullness of the bass sound  
regardless of how low you set the volume.  
VOL (volume), [00 to 30 or 50 *4]  
Adjust the volume.  
4
5
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust other PSM  
items if necessary.  
1
*
When you adjust the bass, mid-range, treble, or super  
bass, the adjustment you have made is stored for the  
currently selected sound mode (iEQ) including “USER.”  
If you are using a two-speaker system, set the fader  
level to “00.”  
Range adjustment for super bass is adjustable only  
when it is set to “S.BS ON.”  
Depending on the amplifier gain control setting. (See  
page 17 for details.)  
Finish the procedure.  
2
3
4
*
*
*
Continued on the next page  
15  
Indications  
Item  
: Initial)  
Setting, [reference page]  
(
DEMO  
Display demonstration  
DEMO ON  
:
Display demonstration will be activated automatically if no  
operation is done for about 20 seconds, [6].  
Cancels.  
DEMO OFF  
:
:
CLK DISP *1  
Clock display  
ON  
Clock time is shown on the display at all times when the power is  
turned off.  
OFF  
:
Cancels; pressing DISP will show the clock time for about  
5 seconds when the power is turned off, [6].  
CLOCK H  
Hour adjustment  
0 – 23  
(1 – 12)  
[Initial: 0 (0:00)], [6]  
[Initial: 00 (0:00)], [6]  
CLOCK M  
00 – 59  
Minute adjustment  
24H/12H  
Time display mode  
24H  
12H  
:
:
See also page 6 for setting.  
CLK ADJ *2  
AUTO  
The built-in clock is automatically adjusted using the CT (clock  
Clock adjustment  
time) data in the RDS signal.  
Cancels.  
OFF  
:
:
AF-REG *2  
Alternative frequency/  
regionalization reception  
AF  
When the currently received signals become weak, the unit  
switches to another station (the programme may differ from the  
one currently received), [10].  
• The AF indicator lights up.  
AF REG  
:
:
When the currently received signals become weak, the unit  
switches to another station broadcasting the same programme.  
• The AF and REG indicators light up.  
OFF  
Cancels.  
PTY-STBY *2  
PTY standby  
OFF, PTY  
codes  
Activates PTY Standby Reception with one of the PTY codes, [9,10].  
TA VOL *2  
Traffic announcement  
volume  
VOL 00 – VOL [Initial: VOL 15]  
30 or 50 *3  
P-SEARCH *2  
Programme search  
ON  
OFF  
:
:
Activates Programme Search, [10].  
Cancels.  
1
*
If the power supply is not interrupted by turning off the ignition key of your car, it is recommended to select “OFF” to  
save the car’s battery.  
Only for FM RDS stations.  
Depends on the amplifier gain control.  
2
3
*
*
16  
Indications  
Item  
: Initial)  
Setting, [reference page]  
(
DIMMER  
Dimmer  
ON  
OFF  
:
:
Activates dimmer.  
Cancels.  
TEL  
MUTING 1/  
MUTING 2  
OFF  
:
:
Select either one which mutes the sounds while using a cellular  
phone.  
Cancels.  
Telephone muting  
SCROLL *4  
Scroll  
ONCE  
AUTO  
OFF  
:
:
:
Scrolls the track information once.  
Repeats scrolling (at 5-second intervals).  
Cancels.  
• Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display  
regardless of the setting.  
AUX ADJ  
Auxiliary input level  
adjustment  
A.ADJ 00  
– A.ADJ 05  
:
Adjust the auxiliary input level to avoid the sudden increase  
of the output level when changing the source from external  
component connected to the AUX input jack on the control panel.  
TAG DISP  
Tag display  
TAG ON  
TAG OFF  
:
:
Shows the Tag information while playing MP3/WMA tracks, [12].  
Cancels.  
AMP GAIN  
Amplifier gain control  
LOW PWR  
:
VOL 00 – VOL 30 (Select this if the maximum power of the  
speaker is less than 50 W to prevent damaging the speaker.)  
VOL 00 – VOL 50  
HIGH PWR  
:
:
IF BAND  
Intermediate frequency  
band  
AUTO  
Increases the tuner selectivity to reduce interference noises  
between close stations. (Stereo effect may be lost.)  
Subject to interference noises from adjacent stations, but sound  
quality will not be degraded and the stereo effect will remain.  
WIDE  
:
4
*
Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.  
17  
More about this unit  
External component  
operations  
Basic operations  
Turning on the power  
• By pressing SRC on the unit, you can also turn on the  
power. If the source is ready, playback also starts.  
You can connect an external component to the  
AUX (auxiliary) input jack on the control panel.  
Turning off the power  
• If you turn off the power while listening to a track,  
playback starts from where it has been stopped  
previously, next time you turn on the power.  
General  
• If you change the source while listening to a disc or  
an iPod, playback stops.  
Next time you select “CD” or “IPOD” as the playback  
source, playback starts from where it has been  
stopped/paused previously.  
~
• After ejecting a disc or disconnecting an iPod,  
“NO DISC” or “NO IPOD” appears and you cannot  
operate some of the buttons. Insert another disc,  
reconnect an iPod, or press SRC to select another  
playback source.  
Ÿ Turn on the connected component and  
start playing the source.  
! Adjust the volume.  
Tuner operations  
Storing stations in memory  
• During SSM search...  
– All previously stored stations are erased and  
stations are stored newly.  
Adjust the sound as you want. (See  
– Received stations are preset in No. 1 (lowest  
frequency) to No. 6 (highest frequency).  
– When SSM is over, the station stored in No. 1 will  
be automatically tuned in.  
pages 14 and 15.)  
• When storing a station manually, the previously  
preset station is erased when a new station is stored  
in the same preset number.  
To check other information while listening  
to an external component  
AUX IN Ô Clock  
FM RDS operations  
• Network-Tracking Reception requires two types of  
RDS signals—PI (Programme Identification) and AF  
(Alternative Frequency) to work correctly. Without  
receiving these data correctly, Network-Tracking  
Reception will not operate correctly.  
18  
• If a Traffic Announcement is received by TA Standby  
Reception, the volume level automatically changes to  
the preset level (TA VOL) if the current level is lower  
than the preset level.  
• When Alternative Frequency Reception is activated  
(with AF selected), Network-Tracking Reception is  
also activated automatically. (See page 16.)  
• If you want to know more about RDS, visit  
<http://www.rds.org.uk>.  
– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.  
– CD-R/CD-RW on which the files are written with  
“Packet Write” method.  
– There are improper recording conditions (missing  
data, etc.) or media conditions (stained, scratched,  
warped, etc.).  
• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time since the  
reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than that of regular  
CDs.  
• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:  
– Discs with stickers, labels, or a protective seal stuck  
to the surface.  
– Discs on which labels can be directly printed by an  
ink jet printer.  
Using these discs under high temperatures or high  
humidities may cause malfunctions or damage to the  
unit.  
Disc operations  
Caution for DualDisc playback  
• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply  
with the “Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard.  
Therefore, the use of Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on  
this product may not be recommended.  
General  
Playing an MP3/WMA disc  
• This unit has been designed to reproduce CDs/CD  
Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/CD-RWs (Rewritable)  
in audio CD (CD-DA), MP3 and WMA formats.  
• When a disc is inserted upside down, “PLEASE” and  
“EJECT” appear alternately on the display. Press 0 to  
eject the disc.  
• MP3 and WMA “tracks” (words “file” and “track” are  
used interchangeably) are recorded in “folders.”  
• While fast-forwarding or reversing on an MP3 or  
WMA disc, you can only hear intermittent sounds.  
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files with the  
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> (regardless of  
the letter case—upper/lower).  
• This unit can show the names of albums, artists  
(performer), and Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or  
2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.  
• This unit can display only one-byte characters. No  
other characters can be correctly displayed.  
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the  
conditions below:  
– Bit rate: 8 kbps — 320 kbps  
– Sampling frequency:  
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW  
• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.  
• This unit can play back only files of the same type  
which are first detected if a disc includes both audio  
CD (CD-DA) files and MP3/WMA files.  
• This unit can play back multi-session discs; however,  
unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.  
• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not play back on this  
unit because of their disc characteristics, or for the  
following reasons:  
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)  
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)  
– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/ Level 2, Romeo,  
Joliet, Windows long file name  
• The maximum number of characters for file/folder  
names vary among the disc format used (includes 4  
extension characters—<.mp3> or <.wma>).  
– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters  
– ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters  
– Romeo: up to 128 characters  
– Discs are dirty or scratched.  
– Moisture condensation occurs on the lens inside  
the unit.  
– Joliet: up to 64 characters  
– Windows long file name: up to 128 characters  
Continued on the next page  
19  
• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files, of 200  
folders, and of 8 hierarchies.  
• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR (variable  
bit rate).  
• If your iPod software version is older than those  
mentioned above, you may not be able to control the  
iPod properly. Update your iPod to the latest software  
version before using it with this unit.  
Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in elapsed  
time display, and do not show the actual elapsed  
time. Especially, after performing the search function,  
this difference becomes noticeable.  
• This unit cannot play back the following files:  
– MP3 files encoded with MP3i and MP3 PRO format.  
– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.  
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.  
– WMA files encoded with lossless, professional, and  
voice format.  
– WMA files which are not based upon Windows  
Media® Audio.  
– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.  
– Files which have the data such as AIFF, ATRAC3,  
etc.  
– You can check the software version of your iPod  
from “About” in the “Setting” menu of the iPod.  
– For details about updating your iPod, visit  
<http://www.apple.com>.  
• When you turn on this unit, the iPod is charged  
through this unit.  
• While the iPod is connected, all operations from the  
iPod are disabled. Perform all operations from this  
unit.  
• While connecting an iPod with Video:  
– No video shows on the iPod’s display or the  
external monitor (only the audio part is available).  
– It is not possible to browse video files on the  
“Video“ menu. (If you connect the iPod during  
playback or pausing of a video file, resuming  
playback will not work.)  
• The search function works but search speed is not  
constant.  
• iPod shuffle is not controllable.  
• You can control the iPod from this unit when “JVC” or  
Ejecting a disc  
” appears on the iPod display.  
• If the ejected disc is not removed within 15 seconds,  
the disc is automatically inserted again into the  
loading slot to protect it from dust. Playback starts  
automatically.  
• The songs order displayed on the selecting menu of  
this unit may differ from the iPod.  
• If playback is stopped, select a track from the  
selecting menu or press .  
• The text information may not be displayed correctly.  
– Some characters such as accented letters cannot be  
shown correctly on the display.  
– Depends on the condition of communication  
between the iPod and the unit.  
• If the text information includes more than 8  
characters, it scrolls on the display. This unit can  
display up to 40 characters.  
iPod operations  
Controllable iPod  
Software version  
iPod with dock connector  
(3rd Generation)  
2.3 or later  
iPod with Click Wheel  
(4th Generation)  
3.1 or later  
iPod mini  
iPod photo  
iPod nano  
1.4 or later  
1.2 or later  
1.0 or later  
1.0 or later  
General settings—PSM  
• If you change the “AMP GAIN” setting from  
“HIGH PWR” to “LOW PWR” while the volume level  
is set higher than “VOL 30,” the unit automatically  
changes the volume level to “VOL 30.”  
iPod with Video  
(5th Generation)  
20  
Hierarchical structure of file searching when an iPod is connected  
21  
To keep discs clean  
Maintenance  
A dirty disc may not play correctly.  
If a disc does become dirty, wipe it with  
a soft cloth in a straight line from center  
to edge.  
• Do not use any solvent (for example, conventional  
record cleaner, spray, thinner, benzine, etc.) to clean  
discs.  
How to clean the connectors  
Frequent detachment will deteriorate the connectors.  
To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe the  
connectors with a cotton swab or cloth moistened with  
alcohol, being careful not to damage the connectors.  
To play new discs  
New discs may have some rough spots  
around the inner and outer edges. If  
such a disc is used, this unit may reject  
the disc.  
Connector  
To remove these rough spots, rub the edges with a  
pencil or ball-point pen, etc.  
Moisture condensation  
Moisture may condense on the lens inside the unit in  
the following cases:  
• After starting the heater in the car.  
Do not use the following discs:  
• If it becomes very humid inside the car.  
Should this occur, the unit may malfunction. In this  
case, eject the disc and leave the unit turned on for a  
few hours until the moisture evaporates.  
Warped disc  
Sticker  
Sticker residue  
How to handle discs  
When removing a disc from its  
case, press down the center holder  
of the case and lift the disc out,  
holding it by the edges.  
Center holder  
Stick-on label  
• Always hold the disc by the edges.  
Do not touch its recording surface.  
Unusual shape  
When storing a disc into its case, gently insert the  
disc around the center holder (with the printed surface  
facing up).  
Single CD (8 cm disc)  
• Make sure to store discs into the cases after use.  
22  
Troubleshooting  
What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service center.  
Symptoms  
Remedies/Causes  
• Sound cannot be heard from the speakers. • Adjust the volume to the optimum level.  
• Check the cords and connections.  
• The unit does not work at all.  
Reset the unit (see page 2).  
Store stations manually.  
Connect the aerial firmly.  
Insert the disc correctly.  
• SSM automatic presetting does not work.  
• Static noise while listening to the radio.  
• Disc cannot be played back.  
• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played back.  
• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot be  
skipped.  
• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.  
• Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component which  
you used for recording.  
• Disc can neither be played back nor ejected. • Unlock the disc (see page 11).  
• Eject the disc forcibly (see page 2).  
• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted.  
• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.  
• Change the disc.  
• Check the cords and connections.  
• “NO DISC” appears on the display.  
• Disc cannot be played back.  
Insert a playable disc into the loading slot.  
• Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in the  
format compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1, Level 2,  
Romeo, or Joliet.  
• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to the  
file names.  
• Noise is generated.  
Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not add the  
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to non-MP3 or  
WMA tracks.)  
• A longer readout time is required (“CHECK” Do not use too many hierarchies and folders.  
keeps flashing on the display).  
Continued on the next page  
23  
Symptoms  
Remedies/Causes  
• Tracks do not play back in the order you  
have intended them to play.  
Playback order is determined when the files are recorded.  
• Elapsed playing time is not correct.  
This sometimes occurs during play. This is caused by how  
the tracks are recorded on the disc.  
• “PLEASE” and “EJECT” appear alternately  
on the display.  
Insert a disc that contains MP3/WMA tracks.  
• Correct characters are not displayed (e.g.  
album name).  
This unit can only display letters (upper case), numbers,  
and a limited number of symbols.  
• The iPod does not turn on or does not  
work.  
• Check the connecting cable and its connection.  
• Update the firmware version.  
• Charge the battery.  
• The sound is distorted.  
Deactivate the equalizer either on the unit or the iPod.  
• “NO IPOD” appears on the display.  
• Check the connecting cable and its connection.  
• Charge the battery.  
• Playback stops.  
The headphones are disconnected during playback. Turn  
off the unit‘s power and turn it on again.  
• No sound can be heard when connecting  
an iPod nano.  
• Disconnect the headphones from the iPod nano.  
• Update the firmware version of the iPod nano.  
• “NO FILES” appears on the display.  
No tracks are stored. Import tracks to the iPod.  
Reconnect the iPod.  
• “RESET 1” – “RESET 7” appears on the  
display.  
• “RESET 8” appears on the display.  
Check the connecting cable and its connection.  
Reset the iPod.  
• The iPod’s controls do not work after  
disconnecting from this unit.  
• Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the  
United States and/or other countries.  
• iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.  
24  
Specifications  
AUDIO AMPLIFIER SECTION  
Maximum Power Output:  
CD PLAYER SECTION  
Type:  
Compact disc player  
Front/Rear:  
Continuous Power Output (RMS):  
50 W per channel  
Signal Detection  
System:  
Non-contact optical pickup  
(semiconductor laser)  
Number of Channels: 2 channels (stereo)  
Frequency Response: 5 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
Front/Rear:  
19 W per channel into  
4 Ω, 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz at  
no more than 0.8% total  
harmonic distortion.  
Dynamic Range:  
96 dB  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 98 dB  
Load Impedance:  
Tone Control Range:  
Bass/Mid-range/  
Treble:  
Frequency Response:  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 70 dB  
4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)  
Wow and Flutter:  
Less than measurable limit  
MP3 Decoding Format: (MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3)  
12 dB at 60 Hz/1 kHz/  
7.5 kHz  
40 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
Max. Bit Rate:  
320 kbps  
WMA (Windows Media® Audio) Decoding Format:  
Max. Bit Rate:  
192 kbps  
Line-Out Level  
Impedance:  
Output Impedance:  
Other Terminal:  
2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)  
GENERAL  
Power Requirement:  
1 kΩ  
Operating Voltage: DC 14.4 V  
(11 V to 16 V allowance)  
Negative ground  
AUX (auxiliary) input jack,  
iPod jack, Steering wheel  
remote input  
Grounding System:  
Allowable Operating 0°C to +40°C  
Temperature:  
Dimensions (W × H × D): (approx.)  
Installation Size:  
Panel Size:  
Mass:  
TUNER SECTION  
Frequency Range:  
FM:  
AM:  
182 mm × 52 mm × 150 mm  
187 mm × 58 mm × 13 mm  
1.3 kg  
(excluding accessories)  
87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz  
MW: 522 kHz to 1 620 kHz  
LW: 144 kHz to 279 kHz  
FM Tuner  
Usable Sensitivity:  
50 dB Quieting  
Sensitivity:  
11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)  
16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)  
Design and specifications are subject to change without  
notice.  
Alternate Channel  
Selectivity (400 kHz):  
Frequency Response:  
Stereo Separation:  
MW Tuner  
65 dB  
40 Hz to 15 000 Hz  
30 dB  
Sensitivity/Selectivity: 20 μV/35 dB  
LW Tuner  
Sensitivity:  
50 μV  
25  
Having TROUBLE with operation?  
Please reset your unit  
Refer to page of How to reset your unit  
Vous avez des PROBLÈMES de fonctionnement?  
Réinitialisez votre appareil  
Référez-vous à la page intitulée Comment réinitialiser votre appareil  
Dear Customer,  
Cher(e) client(e),  
This apparatus is in conformance with the valid European  
directives and standards regarding electromagnetic  
compatibility and electrical safety.  
Cet appareil est conforme aux directives et normes  
européennes en vigueur concernant la compatibilité  
électromagnétique et à la sécurité électrique.  
European representative of Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
is:  
Représentant européen de la société Victor Company of Japan,  
Limited:  
JVC Technology Centre Europe GmbH  
Postfach 10 05 52  
61145 Friedberg  
JVC Technology Centre Europe GmbH  
Postfach 10 05 52  
61145 Friedberg  
Allemagne  
Germany  
EN, FR  
© 2007 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
0107DTSMDTJEIN  
KD-PDR31  
Installation/Connection Manual  
Manuel d’installation/raccordement  
0107DTSMDTJEIN  
EN, FR  
GET0469-010A  
[EX/EU]  
© 2007 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
ENGLISH  
FRANÇAIS  
This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical systems. If your vehicle  
does not have this system, a voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC IN-CAR  
ENTERTAINMENT dealers.  
Cet appareil est conçu pour fonctionner sur des sources de courant continu de 12 V à masse NEGATIVE.  
Si votre véhicule n’offre pas ce type d’alimentation, il vous faut un convertisseur de tension, que vous pouvez  
acheter chez un revendeur d’autoradios JVC.  
WARNINGS  
AVERTISSEMENTS  
Pour éviter tout court-circuit, nous vous recommandons de débrancher la borne négative de la batterie et  
d’effectuer tous les raccordements électriques avant d’installer l’appareil.  
Assurez-vous de raccorder de nouveau la mise à la masse de cet appareil au châssis de la  
voiture après l’installation.  
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery’s negative terminal and make all  
electrical connections before installing the unit.  
Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after installation.  
Notes:  
• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently, consult your JVC IN-CAR  
ENTERTAINMENT dealer.  
• It is recommended to connect to the speakers with maximum power of more than 50 W (both at  
the rear and at the front, with an impedance of 4 to 8 ). If the maximum power is less than  
50 W, change “AMP GAIN” setting to prevent the speakers from being damaged (see page 17 of the  
INSTRUCTIONS).  
Remarques:  
Remplacer le fusible par un de la valeur précisée. Si le fusible saute souvent, consulter votre revendeur  
d’autoradios JVC.  
Il est recommandé de connecter des enceintes avec une puissance de plus de 50 W (les enceintes arrière  
et les enceintes avant, avec une impédance comprise entre 4 et 8 ). Si la puissance maximum est  
inférieure à 50 W, changez “AMP GAIN” pour éviter d’endommager vos enceintes (voir page 17 du  
MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS).  
• To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.  
• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it when removing this unit.  
Pour éviter les court-circuits, couvrir les bornes des fils qui ne sont PAS UTILISÉS avec de la bande  
isolante.  
Le dissipateur de chaleur devient très chaud après usage. Faire attention de ne pas le toucher en retirant  
cet appareil.  
Heat sink  
Dissipateur de chaleur  
PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections:  
PRECAUTIONS sur l’alimentation et la connexion des enceintes:  
DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the car battery; otherwise, the unit  
will be seriously damaged.  
NE CONNECTEZ PAS les fils d’enceintes du cordon d’alimentation à la batterie; sinon,  
l’appareil serait sérieusement endommagé.  
• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the speakers, check the speaker wiring in  
your car.  
AVANT de connecter les fils d’enceintes du cordon d’alimentation aux enceintes, vérifiez le câblage des  
enceintes de votre voiture.  
Parts list for installation and connection  
Liste des pièces pour l’installation et raccordement  
The following parts are provided for this unit. If any item is missing, consult your JVC IN-CAR  
ENTERTAINMENT dealer immediately.  
Les pièces suivantes sont fournies avec cet appareil. Si quelque chose manquait, consultez votre revendeur  
autoradio JVC immédiatement.  
A / B  
C
D
E
Hard case/Control panel  
Etui de transport/Panneau de commande  
Sleeve  
Manchon  
Trim plate  
Plaque d’assemblage  
Power cord  
Cordon d’alimentation  
F
G
H
I
Connection cable for iPod  
Câble de connexion pour iPod  
Cable tie  
Collier pour câble  
Washer (ø5)  
Rondelle (ø5)  
Lock nut (M5)  
Ecrou d’arrêt (M5)  
K
L
M
N
J
Rubber cushion  
Amortisseur en caoutchouc  
Handles  
Poignées  
Remote controller  
Télécommande  
Battery  
Pile  
Mounting bolt (M5 × 20 mm)  
Boulon de montage (M5 × 20 mm)  
1
INSTALLATION (MONTAGE DANS LE TABLEAU DE BORD)  
L’illustration suivante est un exemple d’installation typique. Si vous avez des questions ou avez besoin  
d’information sur des kits d’installation, consulter votre revendeur d’autoradios JVC ou une compagnie  
d’approvisionnement.  
INSTALLATION (IN-DASH MOUNTING)  
The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information  
regarding installation kits, consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer or a company supplying  
kits.  
Si l’on n’est pas sûr de pouvoir installer correctement cet appareil, le faire installer par un technicien  
qualifié.  
• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.  
Do the required electrical connections.  
Réalisez les connexions électriques.  
Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the  
sleeve firmly in place.  
Tordez les languettes appropriées  
pour maintenir le manchon en place.  
Removing the unit  
Retrait de l’appareil  
Before removing the unit, release the rear section.  
Avant de retirer l’appareil, libérer la section arrière.  
Insert the two handles, then pull them as  
illustrated so that the unit can be removed.  
Insérez les deux poignées, puis tirez de la façon  
illustrée de façon à retirer l’appareil.  
When using the optional stay / Lors de l’utilisation du  
hauban en option  
When installing the unit without using the sleeve / Lors de l’installation de l’appareil  
scans utiliser de manchon  
In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.  
Dans une voiture Toyota, par exemple, retirez d’abord l’autoradio et installez l’appareil à sa place.  
Stay (option)  
Hauban (en option)  
Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
Vis à tête plate (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
Fire wall  
Cloison  
Dashboard  
Tableau de bord  
Bracket*2  
Support*2  
Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
Vis à tête plate (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
Screw (option)  
Vis (en option)  
Pocket  
Poche  
Bracket*2  
Support*2  
Note  
: When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm-long screws. If longer screws  
are used, they could damage the unit.  
Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚.  
Installez l’appareil avec un angle de moins  
de 30˚.  
Remarque : Lors de l’installation de l’appareil sur le support de montage, s’assurer d’utiliser des vis d’une longueur de  
8 mm. Si des vis plus longues sont utilisées, elles peuvent endommager l’appareil.  
1
1
*
*
Lorsque vous mettez l’appareil à la verticale, faire attention de ne pas endommager le fusible situé sur l’arrière.  
Non fourni avec cet autoradio.  
*
*
When you stand the unit, be careful not to damage the fuse on the rear.  
Not supplied for this unit.  
2
2
2
ENGLISH  
FRANÇAIS  
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS  
RACCORDEMENTS ELECTRIQUES  
If your car is equipped with the ISO  
connector / Si votre voiture est équippée  
d’un connecteur ISO  
For some VW/Audi or Opel (Vauxhall) automobile / Pour certaine voiture VW/Audi ou Opel  
(Vauxhall)  
You may need to modify the wiring of the supplied power cord as illustrated.  
• Contact your authorized car dealer before installing this unit.  
Vous aurrez peut-être besoin de modifier le câblage du cordon d’alimentation fourni comme montré sur l’illustration.  
Contactez votre revendeur automobile autorisé avant d’installer l’appareil.  
A
• Connect the ISO connectors as illustrated.  
Connectez les connecteurs ISO comme montré sur l’illustration.  
From the car body  
De la carrosserie de la  
voiture  
Original wiring / Câblage original  
Modified wiring 1 / Câblage modifié 1  
A
C
B
D
E
F
G
H
ISO connector  
Connecteur ISO  
Use modified wiring 2 if the unit does not turn on.  
Utilisez le câblage modifié 2 si l’appareil ne se met pas sous tension.  
ISO connector of the supplied power cord  
Connecteur ISO pour le cordon d’alimentation  
fourni  
I
J
L
K
M
O
N
P
Modified wiring 2 / Câblage modifié 2  
Y: Yellow  
Jaune  
R: Red  
Rouge  
View from the lead side  
Vue à partir du côté des fils  
Connections without using the ISO connectors / Connexions sans l’utilisation des connecteurs ISO  
B
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious  
damage to this unit.  
The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.  
Avant de commencer la connexion: Vérifiez attentivement le câblage du véhicule. Une connexion  
incorrecte peut endommager sérieusement l’appareil.  
Le fil du cordon d’alimentation et ceux des connecteurs du châssis de la voiture peuvent être différents en  
couleur.  
1 Cut the ISO connector.  
2 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.  
3 Connect the aerial cord.  
1 Coupez le connecteur ISO.  
2
Connectez les fils colorés du cordon d’alimentation dans l’ordre spécifié sur l’illustration ci-dessous.  
3 Connectez le cordon d’antenne.  
4 Finalement, connectez le faisceau de fils à l’appareil.  
4 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.  
To steering wheel remote controller (see diagram  
Pour la télécommande de volant (voir le diagramme  
)
)
Loop (see diagram  
Boucle (voir le diagramme  
)
)
Rear ground terminal  
Borne arrière de masse  
15 A fuse  
Fusible 15 A  
Aerial terminal  
Borne de l’antenne  
iPod jack  
(see diagram  
Prise iPod  
)
Ignition switch  
Interrupteur d’allumage  
(voir le diagramme  
)
Black  
Noir  
To metallic body or chassis of the car  
Vers corps métallique ou châssis de la voiture  
Line out (see diagram  
)
Sortie de ligne (voir le  
Yellow*2  
Jaune*2  
diagramme  
)
To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery (bypassing  
the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)  
À une borne sous tension du porte-fusible connectée à la batterie de la  
voiture (en dérivant l’interrupteur d’allumage) (12 V constant)  
Red  
Rouge  
Fuse block  
Porte-fusible  
To an accessory terminal in the fuse block  
Vers borne accessoire du porte-fusible  
Blue with white stripe  
Bleu avec bande blanche  
To the remote lead of other equipment or power aerial if any (200 mA max.)  
Au fil de télécommande de l’autre appareil ou à l’antenne automatique s’il y en a une  
(200 mA max.)  
Brown  
Marron  
To cellular phone system  
À un système de téléphone cellulaire  
White with black stripe  
Blanc avec bande noire  
White  
Blanc  
Gray with black stripe  
Gris avec bande noire  
Gray  
Gris  
Green with black stripe  
Vert avec bande noire  
Green  
Vert  
Purple with black stripe  
Violet avec bande noire  
Purple  
Violet  
Left speaker (front)  
Enceinte gauche (avant)  
Right speaker (front)  
Enceinte droit (avant)  
Left speaker (rear)  
Enceinte gauche (arrière)  
Right speaker (rear)  
Enceinte droit (arrière)  
1
1
2
*
*
Not supplied for this unit.  
*
*
Non fourni avec cet autoradio.  
Pour vérifier le fonctionnement de cet appareil avant installation, ce fil doit être raccordé, sinon l’appareil ne peut  
pas être mis sous tension.  
2
Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise power  
cannot be turned on.  
3
Connecting the external amplifier / Connexion d’un amplificateur extérieur  
C
You can connect an amplifier to upgrade your car stereo system.  
Vous pouvez connecter un amplificateur pour améliorer votre système autoradio.  
Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote lead of the other equipment so that it  
can be controlled through this unit.  
Connectez le fil de commande à distance (bleu avec bande blanche) au fil de commande à distance de  
l’autre appareil de façon qu’il puisse être commandé via cet appareil.  
Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the amplifier. Leave the speaker leads of Déconnectez les enceintes de cet appareil et connectez-les à l’amplificateur. Laissez les fils  
this unit unused.  
d’enceintes de cet appareil inutilisés.  
Remote lead  
Fil d’alimentation à distance  
Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)  
Connecteur Y (non fourni avec cet autoradio)  
Remote lead (blue with white stripe)  
Fil d’alimentation à distance (bleu avec bande blanche)  
Rear speakers  
Enceintes arrière  
To the remote lead of other equipment or power aerial if any  
Au fil de télécommande de l’autre appareil ou à l’antenne automatique s’il  
y en a une  
JVC Amplifier  
JVC Amplificateur  
Rear speakers  
Enceintes arrière  
Front speakers (see diagram  
Enceintes avant (voir le diagramme  
)
)
D Connecting to the steering wheel remote controller / Connexion de la télécommande de volant  
If your car is equipped with the steering wheel remote controller, you can operate this unit using the  
controller. To do it, a JVC’s OE remote adapter (not supplied) which matches with your car is required.  
Consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer for details.  
Steering wheel remote input  
Entrée de la télécommande de volant  
OE remote adapter (not supplied)  
Adaptateur pour télécommande au volant (non fourni)  
Si votre voiture est munie d’une télécommande de volant, vous pouvez commander cet autoradio en  
utilisant la télécommande. Pour le faire, un adaptateur pour télécommande au volant JVC (non fourni)  
correspondant à votre voiture est nécessaire. Consultez votre revendeur d’autoradio JVC pour les détails.  
Steering wheel remote controller (equipped in the car)  
Télécommande de volant (installée dans la voiture)  
Connecting an Apple iPod / Connexion d’un iPod Apple  
E
Apple iPod (separately purchased)  
iPod Apple (vendu séparément)  
You can connect an iPod to this unit using the supplied connection cable for iPod.  
1 Insert the supplied cable tie across the loop.  
Cable tie  
Collier pour câble  
2 Press in the head of the connection cable for iPod until you hear a clicking sound.  
3 Fasten the connection cable using the cable tie to firmly hold the connection cable in place.  
Vous pouvez connecter un iPod à cet appareil en utilisant le câble de connexion du iPod fourni.  
1 Insérez le collier pour câble fourni dans la boucle.  
2 Faite pression sur la tête du câble de connexion pour iPod jusqu’à ce que vous entendiez un déclic.  
3 Fixez le câble de connexion en utilisant le collier pour câble pour le maintenir solidement le câble de  
connexion en place.  
Connection cable for iPod (supplied)  
Câble de connexion pour iPod (fourni)  
Loop  
Boucle  
iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.  
iPod est une marque de commerce d’Apple Computer, Inc., enregistrée aux États-Unis et dans les autres pays.  
3
3
*
Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of the car—to the place uncoated with paint  
(if coated with paint, remove the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause damage to the unit.  
Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)  
*
Attachez solidement le fil de mise à la masse au châssis métallique de la voiture—à un endroit qui n’est pas  
recouvert de peinture (s’il est recouvert de peinture, enlevez d’abord la peinture avant d’attacher le fil). L’appareil  
peut être endommagé si cela n’est pas fait correctement.  
Cordon de signal (non fourni avec cet autoradio)  
Coupez les fils des enceintes arrière du connecteur ISO de la voiture et connectez-les à l’amplificateur.  
4
5
*
*
4
5
*
*
Cut the rear speaker leads of the car’s ISO connector and connect them to the amplifier.  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
• The fuse blows.  
EN CAS DE DIFFICULTES  
• Le fusible saute.  
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?  
* Les fils rouge et noir sont-ils racordés correctement?  
• Power cannot be turned on.  
• L’appareil ne peut pas être mise sous tension.  
* Is the yellow lead connected?  
* Le fil jaune est-elle raccordée?  
• No sound from the speakers.  
• Pas de son des enceintes.  
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?  
* Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il court-circuité?  
• Sound is distorted.  
• Le son est déformé.  
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?  
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?  
* Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il à la masse?  
* Les bornes “–” des enceintes gauche et droit sont-elles mises ensemble à la masse?  
• Noise interfere with sounds.  
• Interférence avec les sons.  
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and thicker cords?  
* La prise arrière de mise à la terre est-elle connectée au châssis de la voiture avec un cordon court et épais?  
• This unit becomes hot.  
• Cet appareil devient chaud.  
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?  
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?  
* Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il à la masse?  
* Les bornes “–” des enceintes gauche et droit sont-elles mises ensemble à la masse?  
• This unit does not work at all.  
• Cet appareil ne fonctionne pas du tout.  
* Have you reset your unit?  
* Avez-vous réinitialisé votre appareil?  
4
CD RECEIVER  
CD-RECEIVER  
РЕСИВЕР С ПРОИГРЫВАТЕЛЕМ КОМПАКТ-ДИСКОВ  
KD-PDR31  
For canceling the display demonstration, see page 6.  
Zum Abbrechen der Displaydemonstration siehe Seite 6.  
Информацию об отмене демонстрации функций дисплея см. на стр. 6.  
For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.  
Für den Einbau und die Anschlüsse siehe das eigenständige Handbuch.  
Указания по установке и выполнению соединений приводятся в отдельной инструкции.  
INSTRUCTIONS  
BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG  
ИНСТРУКЦИИ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ  
GET0469-006A  
[EY]  
Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.  
Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to obtain the best  
possible performance from the unit.  
IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS  
1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT  
2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to  
qualified service personnel.  
3. CAUTION: Visible and/or invisible class 1M laser radiation when open. Do not view directly with optical  
instruments.  
4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.  
How to reset your unit  
Warning:  
If you need to operate the unit while driving, be  
sure to look ahead carefully or you may be involved  
in a traffic accident.  
This symbol is only valid in  
the European Union.  
Your preset adjustments will also be erased.  
How to forcibly eject a disc  
Information for Users on Disposal of Old  
Equipment  
This symbol indicates that the product with  
this symbol should not be disposed as general  
household waste at its end-of-life. If you wish to  
dispose of this product, please do so in accordance  
with applicable national legislation or other rules in  
your country and municipality. By disposing of this  
product correctly, you will help to conserve natural  
resources and will help prevent potential negative  
effects on the environment and human health.  
Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.  
If this does not work, reset your unit.  
2
How to use the M MODE button  
CONTENTS  
If you press M MODE, the unit goes into functions mode,  
then the number buttons and 5/buttons work as  
different function buttons.  
Control panel ..................................  
Remote controller — RM-RK50 .............  
4
5
Ex.: When number button 2 works as  
MO (monaural) button.  
Getting started................................  
Basic operations...................................................  
6
6
Radio operations .............................  
7
FM RDS operations...........................  
Searching for your favorite FM RDS programme....  
8
8
To use these buttons for their original functions  
again after pressing M MODE, wait for 5 seconds  
without pressing any of these buttons until the  
functions mode is cleared or press M MODE again.  
Disc operations................................ 10  
Playing a disc in the unit ..................................... 10  
iPod operations ............................... 12  
Sound adjustments.......................... 14  
General settings — PSM .................. 15  
External component operations ....... 18  
More about this unit ........................ 18  
Maintenance ................................... 22  
Troubleshooting.............................. 23  
Specifications.................................. 25  
Detaching the control panel  
Attaching the control panel  
Caution on volume setting:  
For security reasons, a numbered ID card is provided  
with this unit, and the same ID number is imprinted on  
the unit’s chassis. Keep the card in a safe place, as it will  
help the authorities to identify your unit if stolen.  
For safety...  
• Do not raise the volume level too much, as this will  
block outside sounds, making driving dangerous.  
• Stop the car before performing any complicated  
operations.  
Discs produce very little noise compared with other  
sources. Lower the volume before playing a disc  
to avoid damaging the speakers by the sudden  
increase of the output level.  
Temperature inside the car...  
If you have parked the car for a long time in hot or cold  
weather, wait until the temperature in the car becomes  
normal before operating the unit.  
3
Control panel  
Parts identification  
Display window  
1
Control dial  
;
a
s
d
RND (random) button  
M MODE button  
(control panel release) button  
Disc information indicators—  
TAG (Tag information), (track/file), (folder)  
DISC indicator  
Playback mode / item indicators—RND (random),  
(disc), (folder), RPT (repeat)  
RDS indicators—AF, REG, TP, PTY  
Tuner reception indicators—MO (monaural),  
ST (stereo)  
S.BASS (super bass) indicator  
EQ (equalizer) indicator  
Tr (track) indicator  
Source display / Time countdown indicator  
Main display  
Sound mode (iEQ: intelligent equalizer)  
indicators—JAZZ, ROCK, HIP HOP, CLASSIC, POPS,  
USER  
2 0 (eject) button  
3
4
5
Loading slot  
T/P (traffic programme/programme type) button  
DISP (display) button  
6 4 /¢ buttons  
f
g
7
8
9
Display window  
(standby/on attenuator) button  
AUX (auxiliary) input jack  
h
j
p 5 (up) / (down) buttons  
q
w
e
r
SEL (select) button  
BAND button  
SRC (source) button  
Remote sensor  
DO NOT expose the remote sensor to strong light  
(direct sunlight or artificial lighting).  
EQ (equalizer) button  
MO (monaural) button  
SSM (Strong-station Sequential Memory) button  
Number buttons  
k
l
/
z
x
c
t
y
u
i
o
RPT (repeat) button  
4
Main elements and features  
Remote controller —  
RM-RK50  
Installing the lithium coin battery  
(CR2025)  
1
(standby/on/attenuator) button  
• Turns the power on if pressed briefly or  
attenuates the sound when the power is on.  
• Turns the power off if pressed and held.  
Aim the remote controller directly at the remote  
sensor on the unit. Make sure there is no obstacle  
in between.  
2 5 U (up) / D (down) buttons  
• Changes the FM/AM bands with 5 U.  
• Changes the preset stations with D .  
• Changes the folder of the MP3/WMA discs.  
• While listening to an Apple iPod:  
– Pauses or resumes playback with D .  
– Enters the main menu with 5 U.  
(Now 5 U/D /2 R/F 3 work as the menu  
selecting buttons.)*  
Warning:  
• Do not install any battery other than CR2025 or  
its equivalent; otherwise, it may explode.  
• Do not leave the remote controller in a place  
(such as dashboards) exposed to direct sunlight  
for a long time; otherwise, it may explode.  
• Store the battery in a place where children  
cannot reach to avoid risk of accident.  
• To prevent the battery from over-heating,  
cracking, or starting a fire:  
– Do not recharge, short, disassemble, heat the  
battery, or dispose of it in a fire.  
– Do not leave the battery with other metallic  
materials.  
3
4
5
VOL – / VOL + buttons  
• Adjusts the volume level.  
SOUND button  
Selects the sound mode (iEQ: intelligent equalizer).  
SOURCE button  
• Selects the source.  
6 2 R (reverse) / F (forward) 3 buttons  
• Searches for stations if pressed briefly.  
• Fast-forwards or reverses the track if pressed and  
held.  
– Do not poke the battery with tweezers or similar  
tools.  
– Wrap the battery with tape and insulate when  
throwing away or saving it.  
• Changes the tracks if pressed briefly.  
• While listening to an iPod (in menu selecting  
mode):  
– Selects an item if pressed briefly. (Then, press  
D to confirm the selection.)  
– Skips 10 items at a time if pressed and held.  
This unit is equipped with the steering wheel  
remote control function.  
• See the Installation/Connection Manual (separate  
volume) for connection.  
* 5 U : Returns to the previous menu.  
D : Confirms the selection.  
5
Basic settings  
Getting started  
• See also “General settings — PSM” on pages  
15 – 17.  
Basic operations  
~ Turn on the power.  
1
2
Ÿ
1
2
Canceling the display demonstrations  
Select “DEMO,” then “DEMO OFF.”  
Setting the clock  
Select “CLOCK H” (hour), then adjust the hour.  
Select “CLOCK M” (minute), then adjust the  
minute.  
Select “24H/12H,” then “24H” (hour) or “12H”  
(hour).  
1
*
You cannot select “CD” as the playback source  
if there is no disc in the unit.  
“NO IPOD” appears if iPod is not connected.  
2
*
! For FM/AM tuner  
3
Finish the procedure.  
Adjust the volume.  
To check the current clock time while the  
power is turned off  
Clock time is shown on the  
display for about 5 seconds. See  
also page 16.  
VOL 20  
Volume level appears.  
@ Adjust the sound as you want. (See  
pages 14 and 15.)  
To drop the volume in  
a moment (ATT)  
To restore the sound, press  
the button again.  
To turn off the power  
6
When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to  
receive  
Radio operations  
~
Lights up when monaural mode is activated.  
Ÿ
Lights up when receiving an FM stereo  
broadcast with sufficient signal strength.  
MONO  
Reception improves, but stereo effect will be lost.  
88.3  
To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same  
procedure. “MONO OFF” appears and the MO indicator  
goes off.  
! Start searching for a station.  
Storing stations in memory  
When a station is received, searching stops.  
To stop searching, press the same button  
again.  
You can preset six stations for each band.  
FM station automatic presetting—  
SSM (Strong-station Sequential  
Memory)  
To tune in to a station manually  
In step ! above...  
1
1
Select the FM band (FM1 – FM3) you want to  
store into.  
2
3
92.5  
M
2
Select a desired station frequency.  
SSM  
“SSM” flashes, then disappears when automatic  
presetting is over.  
Local FM stations with the strongest signals are  
searched and stored automatically in the FM band.  
7
Manual presetting  
Ex.: Storing FM station of 92.5 MHz into preset  
number 4 of the FM1 band.  
FM RDS operations  
What you can do with RDS  
RDS (Radio Data System) allows FM stations to send an  
additional signal along with their regular programme  
signals.  
1
By receiving the RDS data, this unit can do the  
following:  
• Programme Type (PTY) Search (see the following)  
• TA (Traffic Announcement) and PTY Standby  
Receptions (see pages 9 and 16)  
• Tracing the same programme automatically  
—Network-Tracking Reception (see page 10)  
• Programme Search (see pages 10 and 16)  
2
FM I 92.5  
3
P4  
92.5  
Preset number flashes for a while.  
Searching for your favorite  
FM RDS programme  
You can tune in to a station broadcasting your favorite  
programme by searching for a PTY code.  
Listening to a preset station  
1
2
• To store your favorite programme types, see page 9.  
Select the preset station (1 – 6) you want.  
~
The last selected PTY code  
appears.  
Ÿ Select one of your favorite programme  
or  
types.  
or  
Select one of the PTY codes (see page  
10).  
To check the current clock time while  
listening to an FM (non-RDS) or AM station  
• For FM RDS stations, see page 10.  
Frequency Ô Clock  
8
! Start searching for your favorite  
Using the standby receptions  
TA Standby Reception  
programme.  
TA Standby Reception allows the unit to switch  
temporarily to Traffic Announcement (TA) from any  
source other than AM.  
If there is a station broadcasting a programme  
of the same PTY code as you have selected, that  
station is tuned in.  
The volume changes to the preset TA volume level if the  
current level is lower than the preset level (see page  
16).  
To activate TA Standby Reception  
The TP (Traffic Programme) indicator  
either lights up or flashes.  
Storing your favorite programme  
types  
• If the TP indicator lights up, TA Standby Reception is  
activated.  
You can store six favorite programme types.  
• If the TP indicator flashes, TA Standby Reception is  
not yet activated. (This occurs when you are listening  
to an FM station without the RDS signals required for  
TA Standby Reception.)  
Preset programme types in the number buttons  
(1 to 6):  
To activate TA Standby Reception, tune in to another  
station providing these signals. The TP indicator will  
stop flashing and remain lit.  
1
2
Select a PTY code (see steps ~ to ! on  
pages 8 and 9).  
To deactivate the TA Standby Reception  
Select the preset number (1 – 6) you want to  
store into.  
The TP indicator goes off.  
PTY Standby Reception  
PTY Standby Reception allows the unit to switch  
temporarily to your favorite PTY programme from any  
source other than AM.  
To activate and select your favorite PTY code for  
PTY Standby Reception, see page 16.  
The PTY indicator either lights up or flashes.  
• If the PTY indicator lights up, PTY Standby Reception  
is activated.  
Ex.: When “ROCK M” is selected  
3
4
Repeat steps 1 and 2 to store other PTY codes  
into other preset numbers.  
• If the PTY indicator flashes, PTY Standby Reception is  
not yet activated.  
Finish the procedure.  
To activate PTY Standby Reception, tune in to another  
station providing these signals. The PTY indicator will  
stop flashing and remain lit.  
Continued on the next page  
9
To deactivate the PTY Standby Reception, select  
“OFF” for the PTY code (see page 16). The PTY indicator  
goes off.  
To check the current clock time while  
listening to an FM RDS station  
Station name (PS) = Station  
Frequency = Programme  
type (PTY) = Clock = (back to  
the beginning)  
Tracing the same programme—  
Network-Tracking Reception  
When driving in an area where FM reception is not  
sufficient enough, this unit automatically tunes in to  
another FM RDS station of the same network, possibly  
broadcasting the same programme with stronger  
signals (see the illustration below).  
PTY codes  
NEWS, AFFAIRS, INFO, SPORT, EDUCATE, DRAMA,  
CULTURE, SCIENCE, VARIED, POP M (music), ROCK  
M (music), EASY M (music), LIGHT M (music),  
CLASSICS, OTHER M (music), WEATHER, FINANCE,  
CHILDREN, SOCIAL, RELIGION, PHONE IN, TRAVEL,  
LEISURE, JAZZ, COUNTRY, NATION M (music),  
OLDIES, FOLK M (music), DOCUMENT  
When shipped from the factory, Network-Tracking  
Reception is activated.  
To change the Network-Tracking Reception  
setting, see “AF-REG” on page 16.  
Programme A broadcasting on different frequency areas  
(01 – 05)  
Disc operations  
Playing a disc in the unit  
All tracks will be played repeatedly until you change the  
source or eject the disc.  
Automatic station selection—  
Programme Search  
Usually when you press the number buttons, the preset  
station is tuned in.  
To stop play and eject the disc  
If the signals from the FM RDS preset station are not  
sufficient for good reception, this unit, using the AF  
data, tunes in to another frequency broadcasting the  
same programme as the original preset station is  
broadcasting.  
• Press SRC to listen to another  
playback source.  
• The unit takes some time to tune in to another  
station using programme search.  
• See also page 16.  
10  
To fast-forward or reverse the track  
To go to the next or previous tracks  
Other main functions  
Skipping tracks quickly during play  
• For MP3 or WMA discs, you can skip tracks within the  
same folder.  
Ex.: To select track 32 while playing tracks whose  
number is a single digit (1 to 9)  
1
2
To go to the next or previous folders (only for  
MP3 or WMA discs)  
Each time you press the button, you can skip 10  
tracks.  
• After the last track, the first track will be selected  
and vice versa.  
To locate a particular track (for CD) or folder  
(for MP3 or WMA discs) directly  
To select a number from 01 – 06:  
3
To select a number from 07 – 12:  
Prohibiting disc ejection  
You can lock a disc in the loading slot.  
• To use direct folder access on MP3/WMA discs, it  
is required that folders are assigned with 2-digit  
numbers at the beginning of their folder names—  
01, 02, 03, and so on.  
NO EJECT  
To select a particular track in a folder  
(for MP3 or WMA disc):  
To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same  
procedure.  
11  
Changing the display information  
Selecting the playback modes  
You can use only one of the following playback modes  
at a time.  
While playing an audio CD or a  
CD Text  
1
2
Select your desired playback mode.  
Repeat play  
Mode Plays repeatedly  
7
While playing an MP3 or a WMA track  
When “TAG DISP” is set to “TAG ON”  
(see page 17)  
TRK RPT : The current track.  
FLDR RPT * : All tracks of the current folder.  
RPT OFF : Cancels.  
7
Random play  
When “TAG DISP” is set to “TAG OFF”  
Mode Plays at random  
FLDR RND *: All tracks of the current folder, then  
tracks of the next folder and so on.  
DISC RND : All tracks of the current disc.  
: Elapsed playing time with the current  
track number  
: Clock with the current track number  
: Corresponding indicator lights up on the  
display  
RND OFF : Cancels.  
* Only while playing an MP3 or a WMA disc.  
: Corresponding indicator lights up on  
the display  
1
2
*
*
If the current disc is an audio CD, “NO NAME” appears.  
If an MP3/WMA file does not have Tag information,  
folder name and file name appear. In this case, the  
TAG indicator will not light up.  
iPod operations  
You can play songs from an Apple iPod through this unit  
by connecting it with the supplied connection cable for  
iPod.  
• Disconnecting the iPod will stop playback. Press SRC  
to listen to another playback source.  
12  
• For connection, see Installation/Connection Manual  
(separate volume).  
• For details, refer also to the manual supplied with  
your iPod.  
To fast-forward or reverse the track  
To go to the next or previous tracks  
~ Connect an iPod.  
Connection cable for iPod  
Selecting a track from the menu  
1
2
Enter the main menu.  
If an iPod has been connected...  
Now the 5//4 /¢ buttons work as  
the menu selecting buttons*.  
Playback starts automatically from where it has  
been paused previously.  
Select the desired menu.  
Ÿ Adjust the volume.  
PLAYLIST Ô ARTISTS Ô ALBUMS Ô  
SONGS Ô GENRES Ô COMPOSER Ô  
(back to the beginning)  
3
Confirm the selection.  
! Adjust the sound as you want. (See  
pages 14 and 15.)  
To move back to the previous menu,  
press 5.  
Caution:  
• If a track is selected, playback starts  
automatically.  
• Avoid using the iPod if it might hinder your safety  
driving.  
• Make sure all important data has been backed up  
to avoid losing the data.  
• If the selected item has another layer, you will  
enter the layer. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until the  
desired track is played (see page 21).  
• Holding 4 /¢ can skip 10 items at a  
time.  
To pause playback  
To resume playback, press the  
button again.  
* The menu selecting mode will be canceled:  
If no operations are done for about 5 seconds.  
When you confirm the selection of a track.  
13  
Selecting the playback modes  
Sound adjustments  
1
2
You can select a preset sound mode suitable to the  
music genre (iEQ: intelligent equalizer).  
Select your desired playback mode.  
1
2
7
Repeat play  
Mode  
Playback functions (as on iPod)  
ONE RPT : Same as “Repeat One.”  
Preset values  
BAS*1 MID*2 TRE*3 S.BS*4  
Indication (For)  
ALL RPT  
RPT OFF  
: Same as “Repeat All.”  
: Cancels.  
7
Random play  
USER  
00  
00  
00 OFF  
(Flat sound)  
ROCK  
(Rock or disco music)  
Mode  
Playback functions (as on iPod)  
+03 00 +02 ON  
+01 00 +03 OFF  
+02 +01 +02 OFF  
+04 –02 +01 ON  
+03 00 +03 OFF  
ALBM RND *: Same as “Shuffle Albums.”  
CLASSIC  
(Classical music)  
SONG RND : Same as “Shuffle Songs.”  
RND OFF : Cancels.  
POPS  
(Light music)  
* Functions only if you select “ALL” in “ALBUMS” of  
the main “MENU.”  
HIP HOP  
(Funk or rap music)  
: Corresponding indicator lights up  
on the display  
JAZZ  
(Jazz music)  
To check other information while listening  
to an iPod  
*1 : Bass; *2 : Mid-range; *3 : Treble; *4 : Super bass  
Adjusting the sound  
You can adjust the sound characteristics to your  
preference.  
1
2
14  
Indication, [Range]  
General settings — PSM  
BAS *1 (bass), [–06 to +06]  
Adjust the bass.  
MID *1 (mid-range), [–06 to +06]  
You can change PSM (Preferred Setting Mode) items  
listed in the table that follows.  
Adjust the mid-range frequencies sound level.  
TRE *1 (treble), [–06 to +06]  
1
Adjust the treble.  
FAD *2 (fader), [R06 to F06]  
Adjust the front and rear speaker balance.  
2
Select a PSM item.  
BAL (balance), [L06 to R06]  
Adjust the left and right speaker balance.  
S.BS *1 (super bass), [S.BS ON or S.BS OFF],  
[01 to 05, initial: 03]*3  
3
Adjust the PSM item selected.  
Maintain the richness and fullness of the bass sound  
regardless of how low you set the volume.  
VOL (volume), [00 to 30 or 50 *4]  
Adjust the volume.  
4
5
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust other PSM  
items if necessary.  
1
*
When you adjust the bass, mid-range, treble, or super  
bass, the adjustment you have made is stored for the  
currently selected sound mode (iEQ) including “USER.”  
If you are using a two-speaker system, set the fader  
level to “00.”  
Range adjustment for super bass is adjustable only  
when it is set to “S.BS ON.”  
Depending on the amplifier gain control setting. (See  
page 17 for details.)  
Finish the procedure.  
2
3
4
*
*
*
Continued on the next page  
15  
Indications  
Item  
: Initial)  
Setting, [reference page]  
(
DEMO  
Display demonstration  
DEMO ON  
:
Display demonstration will be activated automatically if no  
operation is done for about 20 seconds, [6].  
Cancels.  
DEMO OFF  
:
:
CLK DISP *1  
Clock display  
ON  
Clock time is shown on the display at all times when the power is  
turned off.  
OFF  
:
Cancels; pressing DISP will show the clock time for about  
5 seconds when the power is turned off, [6].  
CLOCK H  
Hour adjustment  
0 – 23  
(1 – 12)  
[Initial: 0 (0:00)], [6]  
[Initial: 00 (0:00)], [6]  
CLOCK M  
00 – 59  
Minute adjustment  
24H/12H  
Time display mode  
24H  
12H  
:
:
See also page 6 for setting.  
CLK ADJ *2  
AUTO  
The built-in clock is automatically adjusted using the CT (clock  
Clock adjustment  
time) data in the RDS signal.  
Cancels.  
OFF  
:
:
AF-REG *2  
Alternative frequency/  
regionalization reception  
AF  
When the currently received signals become weak, the unit  
switches to another station (the programme may differ from the  
one currently received), [10].  
• The AF indicator lights up.  
AF REG  
:
:
When the currently received signals become weak, the unit  
switches to another station broadcasting the same programme.  
• The AF and REG indicators light up.  
OFF  
Cancels.  
PTY-STBY *2  
PTY standby  
OFF, PTY  
codes  
Activates PTY Standby Reception with one of the PTY codes, [9,10].  
TA VOL *2  
Traffic announcement  
volume  
VOL 00 – VOL [Initial: VOL 15]  
30 or 50 *3  
P-SEARCH *2  
Programme search  
ON  
OFF  
:
:
Activates Programme Search, [10].  
Cancels.  
1
*
If the power supply is not interrupted by turning off the ignition key of your car, it is recommended to select “OFF” to  
save the car’s battery.  
Only for FM RDS stations.  
Depends on the amplifier gain control.  
2
3
*
*
16  
Indications  
Item  
: Initial)  
Setting, [reference page]  
(
DIMMER  
Dimmer  
ON  
OFF  
:
:
Activates dimmer.  
Cancels.  
TEL  
MUTING 1/  
MUTING 2  
OFF  
:
:
Select either one which mutes the sounds while using a cellular  
phone.  
Cancels.  
Telephone muting  
SCROLL *4  
Scroll  
ONCE  
AUTO  
OFF  
:
:
:
Scrolls the track information once.  
Repeats scrolling (at 5-second intervals).  
Cancels.  
• Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display  
regardless of the setting.  
AUX ADJ  
Auxiliary input level  
adjustment  
A.ADJ 00  
– A.ADJ 05  
:
Adjust the auxiliary input level to avoid the sudden increase  
of the output level when changing the source from external  
component connected to the AUX input jack on the control panel.  
TAG DISP  
Tag display  
TAG ON  
TAG OFF  
:
:
Shows the Tag information while playing MP3/WMA tracks, [12].  
Cancels.  
AMP GAIN  
Amplifier gain control  
LOW PWR  
:
VOL 00 – VOL 30 (Select this if the maximum power of the  
speaker is less than 50 W to prevent damaging the speaker.)  
VOL 00 – VOL 50  
HIGH PWR  
:
:
IF BAND  
Intermediate frequency  
band  
AUTO  
Increases the tuner selectivity to reduce interference noises  
between close stations. (Stereo effect may be lost.)  
Subject to interference noises from adjacent stations, but sound  
quality will not be degraded and the stereo effect will remain.  
WIDE  
:
4
*
Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.  
17  
More about this unit  
External component  
operations  
Basic operations  
Turning on the power  
• By pressing SRC on the unit, you can also turn on the  
power. If the source is ready, playback also starts.  
You can connect an external component to the  
AUX (auxiliary) input jack on the control panel.  
Turning off the power  
• If you turn off the power while listening to a track,  
playback starts from where it has been stopped  
previously, next time you turn on the power.  
General  
• If you change the source while listening to a disc or  
an iPod, playback stops.  
Next time you select “CD” or “IPOD” as the playback  
source, playback starts from where it has been  
stopped/paused previously.  
~
• After ejecting a disc or disconnecting an iPod,  
“NO DISC” or “NO IPOD” appears and you cannot  
operate some of the buttons. Insert another disc,  
reconnect an iPod, or press SRC to select another  
playback source.  
Ÿ Turn on the connected component and  
start playing the source.  
! Adjust the volume.  
Tuner operations  
Storing stations in memory  
• During SSM search...  
– All previously stored stations are erased and  
stations are stored newly.  
Adjust the sound as you want. (See  
– Received stations are preset in No. 1 (lowest  
frequency) to No. 6 (highest frequency).  
– When SSM is over, the station stored in No. 1 will  
be automatically tuned in.  
pages 14 and 15.)  
• When storing a station manually, the previously  
preset station is erased when a new station is stored  
in the same preset number.  
To check other information while listening  
to an external component  
AUX IN Ô Clock  
FM RDS operations  
• Network-Tracking Reception requires two types of  
RDS signals—PI (Programme Identification) and AF  
(Alternative Frequency) to work correctly. Without  
receiving these data correctly, Network-Tracking  
Reception will not operate correctly.  
18  
• If a Traffic Announcement is received by TA Standby  
Reception, the volume level automatically changes to  
the preset level (TA VOL) if the current level is lower  
than the preset level.  
• When Alternative Frequency Reception is activated  
(with AF selected), Network-Tracking Reception is  
also activated automatically. (See page 16.)  
• If you want to know more about RDS, visit  
<http://www.rds.org.uk>.  
– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.  
– CD-R/CD-RW on which the files are written with  
“Packet Write” method.  
– There are improper recording conditions (missing  
data, etc.) or media conditions (stained, scratched,  
warped, etc.).  
• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time since the  
reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than that of regular  
CDs.  
• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:  
– Discs with stickers, labels, or a protective seal stuck  
to the surface.  
– Discs on which labels can be directly printed by an  
ink jet printer.  
Using these discs under high temperatures or high  
humidities may cause malfunctions or damage to the  
unit.  
Disc operations  
Caution for DualDisc playback  
• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply  
with the “Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard.  
Therefore, the use of Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on  
this product may not be recommended.  
General  
Playing an MP3/WMA disc  
• This unit has been designed to reproduce CDs/CD  
Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/CD-RWs (Rewritable)  
in audio CD (CD-DA), MP3 and WMA formats.  
• When a disc is inserted upside down, “PLEASE” and  
“EJECT” appear alternately on the display. Press 0 to  
eject the disc.  
• MP3 and WMA “tracks” (words “file” and “track” are  
used interchangeably) are recorded in “folders.”  
• While fast-forwarding or reversing on an MP3 or  
WMA disc, you can only hear intermittent sounds.  
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files with the  
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> (regardless of  
the letter case—upper/lower).  
• This unit can show the names of albums, artists  
(performer), and Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or  
2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.  
• This unit can display only one-byte characters. No  
other characters can be correctly displayed.  
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the  
conditions below:  
– Bit rate: 8 kbps — 320 kbps  
– Sampling frequency:  
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW  
• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.  
• This unit can play back only files of the same type  
which are first detected if a disc includes both audio  
CD (CD-DA) files and MP3/WMA files.  
• This unit can play back multi-session discs; however,  
unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.  
• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not play back on this  
unit because of their disc characteristics, or for the  
following reasons:  
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)  
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)  
– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/ Level 2, Romeo,  
Joliet, Windows long file name  
• The maximum number of characters for file/folder  
names vary among the disc format used (includes 4  
extension characters—<.mp3> or <.wma>).  
– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters  
– ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters  
– Romeo: up to 128 characters  
– Discs are dirty or scratched.  
– Moisture condensation occurs on the lens inside  
the unit.  
– Joliet: up to 64 characters  
– Windows long file name: up to 128 characters  
Continued on the next page  
19  
• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files, of 200  
folders, and of 8 hierarchies.  
• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR (variable  
bit rate).  
• If your iPod software version is older than those  
mentioned above, you may not be able to control the  
iPod properly. Update your iPod to the latest software  
version before using it with this unit.  
Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in elapsed  
time display, and do not show the actual elapsed  
time. Especially, after performing the search function,  
this difference becomes noticeable.  
• This unit cannot play back the following files:  
– MP3 files encoded with MP3i and MP3 PRO format.  
– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.  
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.  
– WMA files encoded with lossless, professional, and  
voice format.  
– WMA files which are not based upon Windows  
Media® Audio.  
– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.  
– Files which have the data such as AIFF, ATRAC3,  
etc.  
– You can check the software version of your iPod  
from “About” in the “Setting” menu of the iPod.  
– For details about updating your iPod, visit  
<http://www.apple.com>.  
• When you turn on this unit, the iPod is charged  
through this unit.  
• While the iPod is connected, all operations from the  
iPod are disabled. Perform all operations from this  
unit.  
• While connecting an iPod with Video:  
– No video shows on the iPod’s display or the  
external monitor (only the audio part is available).  
– It is not possible to browse video files on the  
“Video“ menu. (If you connect the iPod during  
playback or pausing of a video file, resuming  
playback will not work.)  
• The search function works but search speed is not  
constant.  
• iPod shuffle is not controllable.  
• You can control the iPod from this unit when “JVC” or  
Ejecting a disc  
” appears on the iPod display.  
• If the ejected disc is not removed within 15 seconds,  
the disc is automatically inserted again into the  
loading slot to protect it from dust. Playback starts  
automatically.  
• The songs order displayed on the selecting menu of  
this unit may differ from the iPod.  
• If playback is stopped, select a track from the  
selecting menu or press .  
• The text information may not be displayed correctly.  
– Some characters such as accented letters cannot be  
shown correctly on the display.  
– Depends on the condition of communication  
between the iPod and the unit.  
• If the text information includes more than 8  
characters, it scrolls on the display. This unit can  
display up to 40 characters.  
iPod operations  
Controllable iPod  
Software version  
iPod with dock connector  
(3rd Generation)  
2.3 or later  
iPod with Click Wheel  
(4th Generation)  
3.1 or later  
iPod mini  
iPod photo  
iPod nano  
1.4 or later  
1.2 or later  
1.0 or later  
1.0 or later  
General settings—PSM  
• If you change the “AMP GAIN” setting from  
“HIGH PWR” to “LOW PWR” while the volume level  
is set higher than “VOL 30,” the unit automatically  
changes the volume level to “VOL 30.”  
iPod with Video  
(5th Generation)  
20  
Hierarchical structure of file searching when an iPod is connected  
21  
To keep discs clean  
Maintenance  
A dirty disc may not play correctly.  
If a disc does become dirty, wipe it with  
a soft cloth in a straight line from center  
to edge.  
• Do not use any solvent (for example, conventional  
record cleaner, spray, thinner, benzine, etc.) to clean  
discs.  
How to clean the connectors  
Frequent detachment will deteriorate the connectors.  
To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe the  
connectors with a cotton swab or cloth moistened with  
alcohol, being careful not to damage the connectors.  
To play new discs  
New discs may have some rough spots  
around the inner and outer edges. If  
such a disc is used, this unit may reject  
the disc.  
Connector  
To remove these rough spots, rub the edges with a  
pencil or ball-point pen, etc.  
Moisture condensation  
Moisture may condense on the lens inside the unit in  
the following cases:  
• After starting the heater in the car.  
Do not use the following discs:  
• If it becomes very humid inside the car.  
Should this occur, the unit may malfunction. In this  
case, eject the disc and leave the unit turned on for a  
few hours until the moisture evaporates.  
Warped disc  
Sticker  
Sticker residue  
How to handle discs  
When removing a disc from its  
case, press down the center holder  
of the case and lift the disc out,  
holding it by the edges.  
Center holder  
Stick-on label  
• Always hold the disc by the edges.  
Do not touch its recording surface.  
Unusual shape  
When storing a disc into its case, gently insert the  
disc around the center holder (with the printed surface  
facing up).  
Single CD (8 cm disc)  
• Make sure to store discs into the cases after use.  
22  
Troubleshooting  
What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service center.  
Symptoms  
Remedies/Causes  
• Sound cannot be heard from the speakers. • Adjust the volume to the optimum level.  
• Check the cords and connections.  
• The unit does not work at all.  
Reset the unit (see page 2).  
Store stations manually.  
Connect the aerial firmly.  
Insert the disc correctly.  
• SSM automatic presetting does not work.  
• Static noise while listening to the radio.  
• Disc cannot be played back.  
• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played back.  
• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot be  
skipped.  
• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.  
• Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component which  
you used for recording.  
• Disc can neither be played back nor ejected. • Unlock the disc (see page 11).  
• Eject the disc forcibly (see page 2).  
• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted.  
• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.  
• Change the disc.  
• Check the cords and connections.  
• “NO DISC” appears on the display.  
• Disc cannot be played back.  
Insert a playable disc into the loading slot.  
• Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in the  
format compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1, Level 2,  
Romeo, or Joliet.  
• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to the  
file names.  
• Noise is generated.  
Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not add the  
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to non-MP3 or  
WMA tracks.)  
• A longer readout time is required (“CHECK” Do not use too many hierarchies and folders.  
keeps flashing on the display).  
Continued on the next page  
23  
Symptoms  
Remedies/Causes  
• Tracks do not play back in the order you  
have intended them to play.  
Playback order is determined when the files are recorded.  
• Elapsed playing time is not correct.  
This sometimes occurs during play. This is caused by how  
the tracks are recorded on the disc.  
• “PLEASE” and “EJECT” appear alternately  
on the display.  
Insert a disc that contains MP3/WMA tracks.  
• Correct characters are not displayed (e.g.  
album name).  
This unit can only display letters (upper case), numbers,  
and a limited number of symbols.  
• The iPod does not turn on or does not  
work.  
• Check the connecting cable and its connection.  
• Update the firmware version.  
• Charge the battery.  
• The sound is distorted.  
Deactivate the equalizer either on the unit or the iPod.  
• “NO IPOD” appears on the display.  
• Check the connecting cable and its connection.  
• Charge the battery.  
• Playback stops.  
The headphones are disconnected during playback. Turn  
off the unit‘s power and turn it on again.  
• No sound can be heard when connecting  
an iPod nano.  
• Disconnect the headphones from the iPod nano.  
• Update the firmware version of the iPod nano.  
• “NO FILES” appears on the display.  
No tracks are stored. Import tracks to the iPod.  
Reconnect the iPod.  
• “RESET 1” – “RESET 7” appears on the  
display.  
• “RESET 8” appears on the display.  
Check the connecting cable and its connection.  
Reset the iPod.  
• The iPod’s controls do not work after  
disconnecting from this unit.  
• Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the  
United States and/or other countries.  
• iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.  
24  
Specifications  
AUDIO AMPLIFIER SECTION  
Maximum Power Output:  
CD PLAYER SECTION  
Type:  
Compact disc player  
Front/Rear:  
Continuous Power Output (RMS):  
50 W per channel  
Signal Detection  
System:  
Non-contact optical pickup  
(semiconductor laser)  
Number of Channels: 2 channels (stereo)  
Frequency Response: 5 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
Front/Rear:  
19 W per channel into  
4 Ω, 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz at  
no more than 0.8% total  
harmonic distortion.  
Dynamic Range:  
96 dB  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 98 dB  
Load Impedance:  
Tone Control Range:  
Bass/Mid-range/  
Treble:  
Frequency Response:  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 70 dB  
4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)  
Wow and Flutter:  
Less than measurable limit  
MP3 Decoding Format: (MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3)  
12 dB at 60 Hz/1 kHz/  
7.5 kHz  
40 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
Max. Bit Rate:  
320 kbps  
WMA (Windows Media® Audio) Decoding Format:  
Max. Bit Rate:  
192 kbps  
Line-Out Level  
Impedance:  
Output Impedance:  
Other Terminal:  
2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)  
GENERAL  
Power Requirement:  
1 kΩ  
Operating Voltage: DC 14.4 V  
(11 V to 16 V allowance)  
Negative ground  
AUX (auxiliary) input jack,  
iPod jack, Steering wheel  
remote input  
Grounding System:  
Allowable Operating 0°C to +40°C  
Temperature:  
Dimensions (W × H × D): (approx.)  
Installation Size:  
Panel Size:  
Mass:  
TUNER SECTION  
Frequency Range:  
FM:  
AM:  
182 mm × 52 mm × 150 mm  
187 mm × 58 mm × 13 mm  
1.3 kg  
(excluding accessories)  
87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz  
MW: 522 kHz to 1 620 kHz  
LW: 144 kHz to 279 kHz  
FM Tuner  
Usable Sensitivity:  
50 dB Quieting  
Sensitivity:  
11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)  
16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)  
Design and specifications are subject to change without  
notice.  
Alternate Channel  
Selectivity (400 kHz):  
Frequency Response:  
Stereo Separation:  
MW Tuner  
65 dB  
40 Hz to 15 000 Hz  
30 dB  
Sensitivity/Selectivity: 20 μV/35 dB  
LW Tuner  
Sensitivity:  
50 μV  
25  
Having TROUBLE with operation?  
Please reset your unit  
Refer to page of How to reset your unit  
Haben Sie PROBLEME mit dem Betrieb?  
Bitte setzen Sie Ihr Gerät zurück  
Siehe Seite Zurücksetzen des Geräts  
Затруднения при эксплуатации?  
Пожалуйста, перезагрузите Ваше устройство  
Для получения информации о перезагрузке Вашего устройства обратитесь на  
соответствующую страницу  
Dear Customer,  
Уважаемый клиент.  
This apparatus is in conformance with the valid European  
directives and standards regarding electromagnetic  
compatibility and electrical safety.  
Данное устройство соответствует действительным  
Европейским директивам и стандартам по электромагнитной  
совместимости и электрической безопасности.  
European representative of Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
is:  
Представительство компании Victor Company of Japan,  
Limited в Европе:  
JVC Technology Centre Europe GmbH  
Postfach 10 05 52  
61145 Friedberg  
JVC Technology Centre Europe GmbH  
Postfach 10 05 52  
61145 Friedberg  
Germany  
Германия  
Sehr geehrter Kunde, sehr geehrte Kundin,  
dieses Gerät stimmt mit den gültigen europäischen Richtlinien  
und Normen bezüglich elektromagnetischer Verträglichkeit  
und elektrischer Sicherheit überein.  
Die europäische Vertretung für die Victor Company of Japan,  
Limited ist:  
JVC Technology Centre Europe GmbH  
Postfach 10 05 52  
61145 Friedberg  
Deutschland  
EN, GE, RU  
© 2007 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
0107DTSMDTJEIN  
KD-PDR31  
Installation/Connection Manual  
Einbau/Anschlußanleitung  
Руководство по установке/подключению  
0107DTSMDTJEIN  
EN, GE, RU  
© 2007 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
GET0469-013A  
[EY]  
ENGLISH  
DEUTSCH  
РУССКИЙ  
This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground  
electrical systems. If your vehicle does not have this system, a  
voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC IN-CAR  
ENTERTAINMENT dealers.  
Dieses Gerät ist für einen Betrieb in elektrischen Anlagen mit 12 V  
Это устройство разработано для эксплуатации на 12 В  
Gleichstrom und (–) Erdung ausgelegt. Verfügt Ihr Fahrzeug nicht постоянного напряжения с минусом на массе. Если Ваш  
über diese Anlage, ist ein Spannungsinverter erforderlich, der bei JVC  
Autoradiohändler erworben werden kann.  
автомобиль не имеет этой системы, требуется инвертор  
напряжения, который может быть приобретен у дилера  
автомобилнего специалиста JVC.  
ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЯ  
Для предотвращения коротких замыканий мы рекомендуем  
Вам отсоединить отрицательный разъем аккумулятора и  
осуществить все подключения перед установкой устройства.  
После установки обязательно заземлите данное  
устройство на шасси автомобиля.  
WARNINGS  
WARNUNGEN  
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the  
battery’s negative terminal and make all electrical connections before  
installing the unit.  
Zur Vermeidung von Kurzschlüssen empfehlen wir, daß Sie den  
negativen Batterieanschluß abtrennen und alle elektrischen Anschlüsse  
herstellen, bevor das Gerät eingebaut wird.  
• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after  
installation.  
Sicherstellen, daß das Gerät nach dem Einbau a Chassis des  
Fahrzeugs geerdet wird.  
Примечания:  
Notes:  
Hinweise:  
Заменяйте предохранитель другим предохранителем  
указанного класса. Если предохранитель сгорает слишком  
часто, обратитесь к дилеру автомобилнего специалиста JVC.  
Рекомендуется подключать динамики с максимальной  
мощностью более 50 Вт (к задней и передней панели  
устройства, с полным сопротивлением от 4 Ω до 8 Ω). Если  
максимальная мощность динамиков менее 50 Вт, перейдите в  
режим “AMP GAIN”, чтобы предотвратить их повреждение (см.  
ИНСТРУКЦИИ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ на стр. 17).  
Для предотвращения короткого замыкания заклейте  
НЕИСПОЛЬЗУЕМЫЕ концы изолирующей лентой.  
Радиатор во время использования сильно нагревается.  
Старайтесь его не трогать во время удаления устройства.  
• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows  
frequently, consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer.  
• It is recommended to connect to the speakers with maximum  
Die Sicherung mit einer der entsprechenden Nennleistung ersetzen.  
Brennt die Sicherung häufig durch, wenden Sie sich an ihren JVC  
Autoradiohändler.  
power of more than 50 W (both at the rear and at the front, with an Es wird empfohlen, Lautsprecher mit einer Maximalleistung von  
impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω). If the maximum power is less than 50 W,  
change “AMP GAIN” setting to prevent the speakers from being  
damaged (see page 17 of the INSTRUCTIONS).  
• To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads  
with insulating tape.  
• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it  
when removing this unit.  
mehr als 50 W anzuschließen (sowohl hinten als auch vorne, mit  
einer Impedanz von 4 Ω bis 8 Ω). Wenn die Maximalleistung  
weniger als 50 W beträgt, stellen Sie „AMP GAIN“ anders ein, um  
Schäden an den Lautsprechern zu vermeiden (siehe Seite 17 der  
BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG).  
Zur Vermeidung eines Kurzschlusses die Anschlußklemmen  
der NICHT VERWENDETEN Leitungen mit Isolierklebeband  
umwickeln.  
Das Abstrahlblech wird nach dem Gebrauch sehr heiß. Beim Ausbau  
des Geräts darauf achten, das Abstrahlblech nicht zu berühren.  
Heat sink  
Abstrahlblech  
Радиатор  
PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker VORSICHTSMASSREGELN beim Anschließen  
connections: der Stromversorgung und Lautsprecher:  
ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЯ по питанию и  
подключению громкоговорителей:  
• НЕ подключайте провода громкоговорителей к  
аккумулятору автомобиля, иначе устройство будет  
повреждено.  
ПЕРЕД подключением проводов громкоговорителей  
к кабелю питания громкоговорителя проверьте схему  
соединений громкоговорителей в Вашем автомобиле.  
• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the • Die Lautsprecherleitungen des Netzkabels NICHT an der  
car battery; otherwise, the unit will be seriously damaged.  
• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the  
speakers, check the speaker wiring in your car.  
Autobatterie anschließen, da sonst das Gerät schwer  
beschädigt wird.  
VOR dem Anschließen der Lautsprecherleitungen des  
Spannunsgversorgungskabels an die Lautsprecher, die  
Lautsprecherverdrahtung in Ihrem Auto überprüfen.  
Parts list for installation and connection  
The following parts are provided for this unit. If any item is missing, Die folgenden Teile werden zusammen mit diesem Gerät geliefert.  
consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer immediately. Falls ein Artikel fehlt, wenden Sie sich sofort an Ihren JVC-  
Autoradiohändler.  
Teileliste für den Einbau und Anschluß  
Список деталей для установки и  
подключения  
Следующие детали поставлены в комплекте с устройством.  
При отсутствии какого-либо элемента немедленно свяжитесь с  
дилером автомобильного специалиста JVC.  
A / B  
C
D
E
Hard case/Control panel  
Etui/Schalttafel  
Sleeve  
Halterung  
Муфта  
Trim plate  
Frontrahmen  
Декоративную панель  
Power cord  
Stromkable  
Кабель питания  
Жесткий футляр/панель управления  
F
G
H
I
Connection cable for iPod  
Verbindungskabel für iPod  
Соединительный кабель  
для iPod  
Cable tie  
Washer (ø5)  
Lock nut (M5)  
Sicherungsmutter (M5)  
Фиксирующая гайка (M5)  
Kabelbinder  
Unterlegscheibe (ø5)  
Кабельная стяжка  
Шайба (њ5)  
J
K
L
M
N
Mounting bolt (M5 × 20 mm)  
Befestigungsschraube (M5 × 20 mm)  
Крепежный болт (M5 × 20 мм)  
Rubber cushion  
Gummipuffer  
Резиновый чехол  
Handles  
Griffe  
Рычаги  
Remote controller  
Fernbedienung  
Диcтaнциoннoго  
yпpaвлeния  
Battery  
Batterie  
Бaтapeйкa  
1
INSTALLATION  
EINBAU  
УСТАНОВКА (УСТАНОВКА В  
ПРИБОРНУЮ ПАНЕЛЬ)  
(IN-DASH MOUNTING)  
(IM ARMATURENBRETT)  
The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have  
any questions or require information regarding installation kits,  
consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer or a company  
supplying kits.  
• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed Sind Sie sich über den richtigen Einbau des Geräts nicht sicher, lassen Если Вы не знаете точно, как следует устанавливать это  
by a qualified technician.  
Die folgende Abbildung zeigt einen typischen Einbau. Bei irgendwelchen На следующих иллюстрациях показана типовая установка.  
Fragen oder wenn Sie Informationen hinsichtlich des Einbausatzes  
brauchen, wenden Sie sich an ihren JVC Autoradiohändler oder ein  
Unternehmen das diese Einbausätze vertreibt.  
Если у Вас есть какие-либо вопросы, касающиеся установки,  
обратитесь к Вашему дилеру автомобилнего специалиста JVC или  
в компанию, поставляющую соответствующие принадлежности.  
Sie es von einem qualifizierten Techniker einbauen.  
устройство, обратитесь к квалифицированному специалисту.  
Do the required electrical connections.  
Nehmen Sie die erforderlichen elektrischen  
Anschlüsse vor.  
Выполните необходимые подключения  
контактов, как показано на оборотной  
стороне этой инструкции.  
Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the  
sleeve firmly in place.  
Die geeigneten Zapfen biegen, um die  
Manschette sicher festzuhalten.  
Отогните соответствующие  
фиксаторы, предназначенные для  
прочной установки корпуса.  
Removing the unit  
Ausbau des Geräts  
Удаление устройства  
Before removing the unit, release the rear section.  
Vor dem Ausbau des Geräts den hinteren Teil freigeben.  
Перед удалением устройства освободите заднюю часть.  
Insert the two handles, then pull them as illustrated  
so that the unit can be removed.  
Die beiden Handgriffe einsetzen und dann ziehen wie  
in der Abbildung gezeigt, so daß das Gerät entfernt  
werden kann.  
Вставьте два рычажка, затем потяните их, как  
показано на рисунке, чтобы вынуть устройство.  
When using the optional stay / Beim Verwenden  
der Anker-Option / При использовании  
дополнительной стойки  
When installing the unit without using the sleeve / Beim Einbau des Geräts ohne  
Halterung / При установке устройства без использования муфты  
In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.  
Zum Beispiel in einem Toyota zuerst das Autoradio ausbauen und dann das Gerät an seinem Platz einbauen.  
В автомобиле Тойота, например, сначала извлеките автомобильный радиоприемник и установите устройство на место.  
Stay (option)  
Anker (Option)  
Стойка (дополнительно)  
Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
Senkkopfschrauben (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
Крепежные винты (M5 × 8 мм)*2  
Fire wall  
Feuerwand  
Стена  
Bracket*2  
Konsole*2  
Кронштейн*2  
Dashboard  
Armaturenbrett  
Приборная панель  
Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
Senkkopfschrauben (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
Крепежные винты (M5 × 8 мм)*2  
Pocket  
Screw (option)  
Schraube (Option)  
Винт (дополнительно)  
Taschen  
Карман  
Bracket*2  
Konsole*2  
Кронштейн*2  
Note  
: When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm-long screws. If longer screws are  
used, they could damage the unit.  
: Beim Anbringen des Gerät an der Konsole sicherstellen, daß 8 mm lange Schrauben verwendet werden. Werden  
längere Schrauben verwendet, können sie das Gerät beschädigen.  
Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚.  
Stellen Sie das Gerät mit einem Winkel von  
weniger als 30˚ auf.  
Hinweis  
Примечание : При установке устройства на крепежный кронштейн, используйте только винты длиной 8 мм. При  
Установите устройство под углом менее 30°.  
использовании более длинных винтов можно повредить устройство.  
1
2
1
2
1
*
*
When you stand the unit, be careful not to damage the fuse on the rear.  
Not supplied for this unit.  
*
*
Beim Aufstellen des Geräts darauf achten, daß die Sicherung auf der  
Rückseite nicht beschädigt wird.  
Wird nicht mit Gerät mitgeliefert.  
*
Устанавливайте устройство таким образом, чтобы не повредить  
предохранитель, расположенный сзади.  
Hе входит в комплект поставки.  
2
*
2
ENGLISH  
DEUTSCH  
РУССКИЙ  
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS  
ELEKTRISCHE ANSCHLÜSSE  
ЭЛЕКТРИЧЕСКИЕ ПОДКЛЮЧЕНИЯ  
If your car is equipped with the ISO  
For some VW/Audi or Opel (Vauxhall) automobile / Bei bestimmten VW-/Audi- order Opel-  
A
connector / Wenn Ihr Fahrzeug mit dem  
ISO-Steckverbinder ausgestattet ist / Если  
(Vauxhall-) Fahrzeugen / Для некоторых автомобилей VW/Audi или Opel (Vauxhall)  
You may need to modify the wiring of the supplied power cord as illustrated.  
• Contact your authorized car dealer before installing this unit.  
автомобиль оснащен разъемом ISO  
Es kann erforderlich sein, die Verdrahtung des mitgelieferten Stromkabels zu modifizieren, wie in der Abbildung gezeigt.  
Wenden Sie sich vor dem Einbau dieses Receivers an Ihre Auto-Fachwerkstatt.  
• Connect the ISO connectors as illustrated.  
Возможно, потребуется изменить схему соединений для прилагаемого шнура питания, как показано на рисунке.  
Перед установкой приемника обратитесь к авторизованному агенту по продажам автомобильных систем.  
Schließen Sie die ISO-Steckverbinder an, wie in der Abbildung gezeigt.  
Подключите разъемы ISO, как показано на рисунке.  
Original wiring / Original verdrahtung /  
Исходная схема соединений  
Modified wiring 1 / Modifizierte Verdrahtung 1 /  
Преобразованная схема соединений 1  
From the car body  
Von der Fahrzeugkarosserie  
От корпуса автомобиля  
A
C
B
D
E
F
G
H
ISO connector  
ISO-Steckverbinder  
Разъем ISO  
Use modified wiring  
Verwenden Sie die modifizierte Verdrahtung  
Если приемник не включается, используйте преобразованную схему  
соединений  
2
if the unit does not turn on.  
2
wenn der Receiver nicht einschaltet.  
ISO connector of the supplied power cord  
ISO-Stecker des mitgelieferten Stromkabels  
Разъем ISO шнура питания, входящего в  
комплект поставки  
I
J
L
2.  
K
M
O
Modified wiring 2 / Modifizierte Verdrahtung 2 /  
Преобразованная схема соединений 2  
N
P
Y: Yellow  
Gelb  
Желтый  
R: Red  
View from the lead side  
Von der Kabelseite aus gesehen  
Вид со стороны выводов  
R
ot  
Красный  
Connections without using the ISO connectors / Anschlüsse ohne Verwendung der ISO-Steckverbinder / Подключение без использования  
разъемов ISO  
B
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully.  
Vor dem Anschließen: Die Verdrahtung im Fahrzeug sorgfältig  
überprüfen. Falsche Anschlüsse können ernsthafte Schäden am Gerät  
hervorrufen.  
Перед началом подключений: Тщательно проверьте  
проводку в автомобиле. Неправильное подключение может  
привести к серьезному повреждению устройства.  
Incorrect connection may cause serious damage to this unit.  
The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car  
body may be different in color.  
Die Leiter des Stromkabels und die Leiter des Anschlusses im Fahrzeug Жилы силового кабеля и жилы соединителя от кузова  
können sich farblich unterscheiden.  
автомобиля могут быть разного цвета.  
1 Cut the ISO connector.  
1 Schneiden Sie den ISO-Steckverbinder auf.  
1 Обрежьте разъем ISO.  
2 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order  
2 Die farbigen Adern des Stromkabels in der Reihenfolge anschließen, 2 Подсоедините цветные провода шнура питания в  
specified in the illustration below.  
wie in der Abbildung unten gezeigt.  
3 Das Antennenkabel anschließen.  
4 Die Kabelbäume am Gerät anschließen.  
указанном ниже порядке.  
3 Connect the aerial cord.  
4 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.  
3 Подключите кабель антенны.  
4 В последнюю очередь подключите электропроводку к  
устройству.  
To steering wheel remote controller (see diagram  
)
An Lenkradfernbedienung (siehe Schaltplan  
)
К рулевому пульту дистанционного управления (см. схему  
)
Loop (see diagram  
)
Schleife (siehe Schaltplan  
)
Петля (см. схему  
)
Rear ground terminal  
Hintere Erdungsc-  
anschlußklemme  
Задний разъем  
заземления  
15 A fuse  
15 A Sicherung  
Предохранитель 15 A  
Aerial terminal  
Antennen-  
anschlußklemme  
Разъем антенны  
iPod jack (see diagram  
)
iPod-Buchse  
(siehe Schaltplan  
)
Ignition switch  
Zündschalter  
Переключатель зажигания  
Black  
Schwarz  
Черный  
Разъем iPod (см. схему  
)
To metallic body or chassis of the car  
Zur metallenen Karosserie oder zum Fahrwerk des Autos  
К металлическому корпусу или шасси автомобиля  
Line out (see diagram  
Schutz kappen Signalausgang  
(siehe Schaltplan  
К выходу (см. схему  
)
Yellow*2  
Gelb*2  
To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery (bypassing  
the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)  
Zur einer stromführenden Anschlußklemme im Sicherungsblock zum  
Anschließen an die Autobatterie (Umgehen des Zündschalters) (konstant 12 V)  
К разъему фазы в блоке предохранителя (минуя блок зажигания)  
(постоянный 12 В)  
)
Желтый*2  
)
Red  
Rot  
Красный  
Fuse block  
Sicherungsblock  
Блок предохранителя  
To an accessory terminal in the fuse block  
Zur einer Zubehöranschlußklemme im Sicherungsblock  
К вспомогательному разъему в блоке предохранителя  
Blue with white stripe  
Blau mit weißem Streifen  
Синий с белой полосой  
To the remote lead of other equipment or power aerial if any (200 mA max.)  
Zum Zusatzkabel des anderen Geräts oder der Motorantenne, sofern vorhanden (max. 200 mA)  
К удаленному проводу другого оборудования или антенны (макс. 200 мА)  
Brown  
Braun  
Коричневый  
To cellular phone system  
An Mobiltelefonsystem  
К системе сотового телефона  
White with black stripe  
Weiß mit schwarzem Streifen  
Белый с черной полосой  
White  
Gray with black stripe  
Gray  
Green with black stripe  
Green  
Purple with black stripe  
Lila mit schwarzem Streifen  
Пурпурный с черной  
полосой  
Purple  
Weiß  
Grau mit schwarzem Streifen  
Grau  
Grün mit schwarzem Streifen  
Grün  
Lila  
Белый Серый с черной полосой  
Серый  
Зеленый с черной полосой  
Зеленый  
Пурпурный  
Left speaker (front)  
Right speaker (front)  
Rechter Lautsprecher (vorne)  
Правый громкоговоритель  
(передний)  
Left speaker (rear)  
Right speaker (rear)  
Rechter Lautsprecher (hinten)  
Правый громкоговоритель  
(задний)  
Linker Lautsprecher (vorne)  
Левый громкоговоритель  
(передний)  
Linker Lautsprecher (hinten)  
Левый громкоговоритель  
(задний)  
1
1
1
*
Not supplied for this unit.  
Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this  
lead must be connected, otherwise power cannot be turned on.  
*
Wird nicht mit Gerät mitgeliefert.  
*
Не входит в комплект поставки.  
Перед проверкой работы устройства подключите этот провод,  
иначе питание не включится.  
2
2
2
*
*
Vor der Überprüfung der Funktionsfähigkeit des Geräts vor dem  
Einbau, muß diese Leitung angeschlossen werden, da sonst die  
Stromversorgung nicht eingeschaltet werden kann.  
*
3
Connecting the external amplifier / Anschließen des externen Verstärkers / Подключение внешнего усилителя  
C
You can connect an amplifier to upgrade your car stereo system.  
Sie können einen Verstärker anschließen, um Ihre Autostereoanlage zu  
erweitern.  
• Schließen Sie das Fernbedienungskabel (blau mit weißem Streifen) an  
das Fernbedienungskabel des anderen Geräts an, so daß es über dieses  
Gerät gesteuert werden kann.  
• Die Lautsprecher von diesem Gerät abtrennen und am  
Verstärker anschließen. Die Lautsprecherleitungen dieses  
Geräts unbenutzt lassen.  
Можно подключить усилитель для обновления автомобильной  
стереосистемы.  
• Подсоедините провод внешнего устройства (синий с  
белой полосой) к проводу внешнего устройства другого  
оборудования так, чтобы им можно было управлять с этого  
устройства.  
• Отсоедините громкоговорители от данного  
устройства, подключите их к усилителю. Оставьте  
провода громкоговорителей данного устройства  
неиспользованными.  
• Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote  
lead of the other equipment so that it can be controlled through  
this unit.  
Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the  
amplifier. Leave the speaker leads of this unit unused.  
Remote lead  
Fernbedienungsleitung  
Провод внешнего устройства  
Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)  
Y-Anschluß (wird nicht mit Gerät mitgeliefert)  
Разъем Y (не входит в комплект поставки)  
Remote lead (blue with white stripe)  
Fernbedienungsleitung (blau mit weißem Streifen)  
Провод внешнего устройства (cиний с белой полосой)  
Rear speakers  
Hintere Lautsprecher  
Задние  
To the remote lead of other equipment or power aerial if any  
Zum Zusatzkabel des anderen Geräts oder der Motorantenne,  
sofern vorhanden  
громкоговорители  
JVC Amplifier  
JVC Verstärker  
JVC-усилитель  
К удаленному проводу другого оборудования или антенны  
Rear speakers  
Hintere Lautsprecher  
Задние громкоговорители  
Front speakers (see diagram  
)
Vordere Lautsprecher (siehe Schaltplan  
)
Передние громкоговорители (см. схему  
)
Connecting to the steering wheel remote controller / Anschluß an die Lenkradfernbedienung / Подключение к рулевому пульту  
D
дистанционного управления  
OE remote adapter (not supplied)  
Steering wheel remote input  
If your car is equipped with the steering wheel remote controller, you can operate this unit using the  
controller. To do it, a JVC’s OE remote adapter (not supplied) which matches with your car is required.  
Consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer for details.  
Radio-Lenkrad-Fernbedienungsadaption (nicht mitgeliefert)  
Aдаптер рулевого пульта дистанционного управления  
OE (не поставляется)  
Eingang für Lenkradfernbedienung  
Вход рулевого пульта  
дистанционного управления  
Wenn Ihr Fahrzeug mit einer Lenkradferndienung ausgestattet ist, können Sie damit diesen Receiver  
steuern. Hierfür ist ein für Ihr Fahrzeug passender Radio-Lenkrad-Fernbedienungsadaption von JVC (nicht  
mitgeliefert) erforderlich. Für weitere Einzelheiten wenden Sie sich an Ihren JVC Autoradiohändler.  
Если автомобиль оборудован рулевым пультом дистанционного управления, его можно  
использовать для управления данным устройством. Для этого необходим адаптер рулевого  
пульта дистанционного управления JVC OE (не поставляется), подходящий для Вашего  
автомобиля. За более подробной информацией обратитесь к поставщику автомобильных  
аудиосистем компании JVC.  
Steering wheel remote controller (equipped in the car)  
Lenkradfernbedienung (im Fahrzeug installiert)  
Рулевой пульт дистанционного управления  
(устанавливаемый в автомобиле)  
Connecting an Apple iPod / Anschließen eines Apple iPod / Подключение проигрывателя Apple iPod  
E
Apple iPod (separately purchased)  
You can connect an iPod to this unit using the supplied connection cable for iPod.  
1 Insert the supplied cable tie across the loop.  
Apple iPod (getrennt gekauft)  
Cable tie  
Apple iPod (продается отдельно)  
Kabelbinder  
Кабельная стяжка  
2 Press in the head of the connection cable for iPod until you hear a clicking sound.  
3 Fasten the connection cable using the cable tie to firmly hold the connection cable in place.  
Sie können einen Apple iPodan dieses Gerät durch Verwendung des mitgelieferten Verbindungskabels für iPod  
anschließen.  
1 Führen Sie den mitgelieferten Kabelbinder über die Schleife.  
2 Drücken Sie den Kopf des Anschlusskabels für den iPod ein, bis Sie ein Klickgeräusch hören.  
3 Befestigen Sie das Verbindungskabel mit dem mitgelieferten Kabelbinder, um das Verbindungskabel fest zu sichern.  
Проигрыватель iPod можно подключить к устройству с помощью соединительного кабеля для iPod.  
1 Вставьте прилагаемый шнурок соединительного кабеля в петлю.  
2 Нажимайте на наконечник соединительного кабеля для iPod до тех пор, пока не услышите звук щелчка.  
3 Прикрепите соединительный кабель с помощью шнурка кабеля для надежного крепления кабеля на  
Connection cable for iPod  
(supplied)  
Verbindungskabel für iPod  
(mitgeliefert)  
Соединительный кабель  
для iPod (входит в  
комплект поставки)  
месте.  
Loop  
Schleife  
Петля  
iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.  
iPod ist ein Warenzeichen von Apple Computer, Inc., eingetragen in den USA und anderen Ländern.  
iPod является торговой маркой Apple Computer, Inc., зарегистрированной в США и других странах.  
3
3
3
*
Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of  
the car—to the place uncoated with paint (if coated with paint, remove  
the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause damage  
to the unit.  
*
Verbinden Sie den Erdungsleiter mit der Karosserie oder dem Rahmen  
*
Плотно прикрепите заземляющий провод к металлическому  
кузову или шасси автомобиля—в месте, не покрытом краской  
(если оно покрыто краской, удалите краску перед тем, как  
прикреплять провод). Невыполнение этого требования может  
привести к повреждению данного устройства.  
des Fahrzeugs. Die Kontaktstelle darf nicht lackiert sein (sollte die  
Kontaktstelle lackiert sein, entfernen Sie den Lack der Kontaktstelle, bevor  
Sie den Leiter befestigen). Wenn der Erdungsleiter nicht ordnungsgemäß  
angeschlossen wird, kann dieses Gerät beschädigt werden.  
4
5
*
*
Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)  
4
5
4
5
Cut the rear speaker leads of the car’s ISO connector and connect them  
to the amplifier.  
*
*
Einzelleitung (wird nicht mit Gerät mitgeliefert)  
Schneiden Sie die hinteren Lautsprecherkabel des ISO-Steckverbinders des  
Fahrzeugs ab, und schließen diese an den Verstärker an.  
*
*
Кабель сигнала (не входит в комплект поставки)  
Отрежьте провода задних громкоговорителей разъема ISO и  
подсоедините их к усилителю.  
BЫЯВЛЕНИЕ НЕИСПРАВНОСТЕЙ  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
FEHLERSUCHE  
• Сработал предохранитель.  
* Правильно ли подключены черный и красный провода?  
• The fuse blows.  
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?  
• Die Sicherung brennt durch.  
* Sind die roten und schwarzen Leitungen richtig angeschlossen?  
• Питание не включается.  
* Подключен ли желтый провод?  
• Power cannot be turned on.  
* Is the yellow lead connected?  
• Stromversorgung kann nicht eingeschaltet werden.  
* Ist die gelbe Leitung angeschlossen?  
• Звук не выводится через громкоговорители.  
* Нет ли короткого замыкания на кабеле выхода  
громкоговорителей?  
• No sound from the speakers.  
• Kein Ton aus den Lautsprechern.  
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?  
*
Ist die Lautsprecherausgangsleitung kurzgeschlossen?  
• Sound is distorted.  
• Ton verzerrt.  
• Звук искажен.  
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?  
* Ist die Lautsprecherausgangsleitung geerdet?  
* Sind die „–“ Anschlußklemmen der linken und rechten Lautsprecher  
zusammen geerdet?  
* Заземлен ли провод выхода громкоговорителей?  
* Заземлены ли разъемы “–” правого (R) и левого (L)  
громкоговорителей?  
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?  
• Noise interfere with sounds.  
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using  
• Störgeräusche im Klang.  
• Шум мешает звучанию.  
* Соединен ли находящийся сзади зажим заземления с шасси  
автомобиля с помощью более короткого и тонкого шнуров?  
shorter and thicker cords?  
* Ist die hintere Erdungsklemme mit kürzeren und dickeren Kabeln an  
das Fahrzeugchassis angeschlossen?  
• This unit becomes hot.  
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?  
• Gerät wird heiß.  
• Устройство нагревается.  
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?  
* Ist die Lautsprecherausgangsleitung geerdet?  
* Sind die „–“ Anschlußklemmen der linken und rechten Lautsprecher  
zusammen geerdet?  
* Заземлен ли провод выхода громкоговорителей?  
* Заземлены ли разъемы “–” правого (R) и левого (L)  
громкоговорителей?  
• This unit does not work at all.  
* Have you reset your unit?  
• Dieser Receiver funktioniert überhaupt nicht.  
* Haben Sie einen Reset am Receiver vorgenommen?  
• Приемник не работает.  
* Выполнена ли перенастройка приемника?  
4
CD RECEIVER  
KD-PDR35  
KD-PDR35  
For canceling the display demonstration, see page 6.  
For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.  
INSTRUCTIONS  
GET0468-001A  
[U/UH]  
Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.  
Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to obtain the best  
possible performance from the unit.  
IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS  
1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT  
2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to  
qualified service personnel.  
3. CAUTION: Visible and/or invisible class 1M laser radiation when open. Do not view directly with optical  
instruments.  
4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.  
How to reset your unit  
[European Union only]  
Warning:  
Your preset adjustments will also be erased.  
If you need to operate the unit while driving, be  
sure to look ahead carefully or you may be involved  
in a traffic accident.  
How to forcibly eject a disc  
Caution on volume setting:  
Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.  
If this does not work, reset your unit.  
Discs produce very little noise compared with other  
sources. Lower the volume before playing a disc  
to avoid damaging the speakers by the sudden  
increase of the output level.  
2
How to use the M MODE button  
CONTENTS  
If you press M MODE, the unit goes into functions mode,  
then the number buttons and 5/buttons work as  
different function buttons.  
Control panel ..................................  
Remote controller — RM-RK50...........  
4
5
Ex.: When number button 2 works as MO (monaural)  
button.  
Getting started................................  
Basic operations...................................................  
6
6
Radio operations .............................  
7
Disc operations................................  
Playing a disc in the unit .....................................  
8
8
To use these buttons for their original functions  
again after pressing M MODE, wait for 5 seconds  
without pressing any of these buttons until the  
functions mode is cleared or press M MODE again.  
iPod operations ............................... 11  
Sound adjustments.......................... 13  
General settings — PSM .................. 14  
External component operations ....... 16  
Maintenance ................................... 16  
More about this unit ........................ 17  
Troubleshooting.............................. 21  
Specifications.................................. 23  
Detaching the control panel  
For safety...  
Attaching the control panel  
• Do not raise the volume level too much, as this will  
block outside sounds, making driving dangerous.  
• Stop the car before performing any complicated  
operations.  
Temperature inside the car...  
If you have parked the car for a long time in hot or cold  
weather, wait until the temperature in the car becomes  
normal before operating the unit.  
3
Control panel  
Parts identification  
Display window  
1
Control dial  
o
;
a
s
RND (random) button  
M MODE button  
(control panel release) button  
Disc information indicators—  
TAG (Tag information), (track/file), (folder)  
DISC indicator  
Playback mode / item indicators— RND (random),  
(disc), (folder), RPT (repeat)  
Tuner reception indicators—MO (monaural),  
ST (stereo)  
2 0 (eject) button  
3
4
5
Loading slot  
EQ (equalizer) button  
DISP (display) button  
6 4 /¢ buttons  
d
f
7
8
9
Display window  
(standby/on attenuator) button  
AUX (auxiliary) input jack  
g
p 5 (up) / (down) buttons  
q
w
e
r
SEL (select) button  
BAND button  
SRC (source) button  
Remote sensor  
DO NOT expose the remote sensor to strong light  
(direct sunlight or artificial lighting).  
MO (monaural) button  
SSM (Strong-station Sequential Memory) button  
Number buttons  
h
j
k
l
/
z
S.BASS (super bass) indicator  
EQ (equalizer) indicator  
Tr (track) indicator  
Source display / Time countdown indicator  
Main display  
Sound mode (iEQ: intelligent equalizer)  
indicators—JAZZ, ROCK, HIP HOP, CLASSIC, POPS,  
USER  
t
y
u
i
RPT (repeat) button  
4
Main elements and features  
Remote controller —  
RM-RK50  
Installing the lithium coin battery  
(CR2025)  
CR2025  
Aim the remote controller directly at the remote  
sensor on the unit. Make sure there is no obstacle  
in between.  
1
(standby/on/attenuator) button  
• Turns the power on if pressed briefly or  
attenuates the sound when the power is on.  
• Turns the power off if pressed and held.  
Warning:  
2 5 U (up) / D (down) buttons  
• Changes the FM/AM bands with 5 U.  
• Changes the preset stations with D .  
• Changes the folder of the MP3/WMA discs.  
• While listening to an Apple iPod.  
– Pauses or resumes playback with D .  
– Enters the main menu with 5 U.  
(Now 5 U/D /2 R/F 3 work as the menu  
selecting buttons.)*  
• Do not install any battery other than CR2025 or its  
equivalent; otherwise, it may explode.  
• Do not leave the remote controller in a place  
(such as dashboards) exposed to direct sunlight  
for a long time; otherwise, it may explode.  
• Store the battery in a place where children cannot  
reach to avoid risk of accident.  
• To prevent the battery from over-heating,  
cracking, or starting a fire:  
– Do not recharge, short, disassemble, heat the  
battery, or dispose of it in a fire.  
3
VOL – / VOL + buttons  
• Adjusts the volume level.  
SOUND button  
4
• Selects the sound mode (iEQ: intelligent  
equalizer).  
– Do not leave the battery with other metallic  
materials.  
– Do not poke the battery with tweezers or  
similar tools.  
5
SOURCE button  
• Selects the source.  
– Wrap the battery with tape and insulate when  
throwing away or saving it.  
* 5 U : Returns to the previous menu.  
D : Confirms the selection.  
Continued on the next page  
5
6 2 R (reverse) / F (forward) 3 buttons  
• Searches for stations if pressed briefly.  
• Fast-forwards or reverses the track if pressed and  
held.  
@ Adjust the sound as you want. (See  
page 13.)  
• Changes the tracks if pressed briefly.  
• While listening to an iPod (in menu selecting  
mode):  
– Selects an item if pressed briefly. (Then, press  
D to confirm the selection.)  
To drop the volume in a  
moment (ATT)  
To restore the sound, press  
the button again.  
To turn off the power  
– Skips 10 items at a time if pressed and held.  
Getting started  
Basic settings  
Basic operations  
~ Turn on the power.  
• See also “General settings — PSM” on pages 14 and  
15.  
1
2
Ÿ
1 Canceling the display demonstrations  
Select “DEMO,” then “DEMO OFF.”  
2 Setting the clock  
Select “CLOCK H” (hour), then adjust the hour.  
Select “CLOCK M” (minute), then adjust the  
minute.  
1
*
You cannot select “CD” as the playback source  
if there is no disc in the unit.  
“NO IPOD” appears if iPod is not connected.  
2
*
3
Finish the procedure.  
! For FM/AM tuner  
To check the current clock time while the  
power is turned off  
Adjust the volume.  
Clock time is shown on the display for  
about 5 seconds. See also page 14.  
VOL 20  
Volume level appears.  
6
When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to  
receive  
Radio operations  
~
Lights up when monaural mode is activated.  
Ÿ
MONO  
Lights up when receiving an FM stereo  
broadcast with sufficient signal strength.  
Reception improves, but stereo effect will be lost.  
To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same  
procedure. “MONO OFF” appears and the MO indicator  
goes off.  
88.3  
! Start searching for a station.  
Storing stations in memory  
You can preset six stations for each band.  
When a station is received, searching stops.  
To stop searching, press the same button  
again.  
FM station automatic presetting—  
SSM (Strong-station Sequential  
Memory)  
1
Select the FM band (FM1 – FM3) you want to  
store into.  
To tune in to a station manually  
In step ! above...  
1
2
3
M
2
Select a desired station frequency.  
SSM  
“SSM” flashes, then disappears when automatic  
presetting is over.  
Local FM stations with the strongest signals are  
searched and stored automatically in the FM band.  
7
Manual presetting  
Ex.: Storing FM station of 92.5 MHz into preset  
number 4 of the FM1 band.  
Disc operations  
Playing a disc in the unit  
All tracks will be played repeatedly until you change the  
source or eject the disc.  
1
2
FM I 92.5  
3
P4  
92.5  
Preset number flashes for a while.  
To stop play and eject the disc  
• Press SRC to listen to another  
playback source.  
Listening to a preset station  
1
2
To fast-forward or reverse the track  
To go to the next or previous tracks  
Select the preset station (1 – 6) you want.  
or  
To go to the next or previous folders (only for  
MP3 or WMA discs)  
To check other information while listening  
to the radio  
Clock Ô Frequency  
8
To locate a particular track (for CD) or folder  
(for MP3 or WMA discs) directly  
Other main functions  
To select a number from 01 – 06:  
Skipping tracks quickly during play  
• For MP3 or WMA discs, you can skip tracks within the  
same folder.  
To select a number from 07 – 12:  
Ex.: To select track 32 while playing a track whose  
number is a single digit (1 to 9)  
1
2
• To use direct folder access on MP3/WMA discs, it  
is required that folders are assigned with 2-digit  
numbers at the beginning of their folder names—  
01, 02, 03, and so on.  
Each time you press the button, you can skip 10  
tracks.  
To select a particular track in a folder  
(for MP3 or WMA discs):  
• After the last track, the first track will be selected  
and vice versa.  
3
Prohibiting disc ejection  
You can lock a disc in the loading slot.  
NO EJECT  
To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same  
procedure.  
9
Changing the display information  
While playing an audio CD or a CD Text  
Selecting the playback modes  
You can use only one of the following playback modes  
at a time.  
1
2
Select your desired playback mode.  
Repeat play  
7
While playing an MP3 or a WMA track  
• When “TAG DISP” is set to “TAG ON”  
(see page 15)  
Mode  
Plays repeatedly  
TRK RPT  
: The current track.  
FLDR RPT* : All tracks of the current folder.  
RPT OFF  
: Cancels.  
7
Random play  
Mode  
Plays at random  
• When “TAG DISP” is set to “TAG OFF”  
FLDR RND* : All tracks of the current folder,  
then tracks of the next folder  
and so on.  
DISC RND  
: All tracks of the current disc.  
RND OFF  
: Cancels.  
: Clock with the current track number  
: Elapsed playing time with the current  
track number  
: Corresponding indicator lights up on  
the display  
* Only while playing an MP3 or a WMA disc.  
: Corresponding indicator lights up  
on the display  
1
2
*
*
If the current disc is an audio CD, “NO NAME” appears.  
If an MP3/WMA file does not have Tag information,  
folder name and file name appear. In this case, the  
TAG indicator will not light up.  
10  
Caution:  
iPod operations  
You can play songs from an Apple iPod through this unit  
by connecting it with the supplied connection cable for  
iPod.  
• Avoid using the iPod if it might hinder your safety  
driving.  
• Make sure all important data has been backed up  
to avoid losing the data.  
• Disconnecting the iPod will stop playback. Press SRC  
to listen to another playback source.  
To pause playback  
• For connection, see Installation/Connection Manual  
(separate volume).  
To resume playback, press the  
button again.  
• For details, refer also to the manual supplied with  
your iPod.  
~ Connect an iPod.  
To fast-forward or reverse the track  
To go to the next or previous tracks  
Connection cable for iPod  
If an iPod has been connected...  
Playback starts automatically from where it has  
been paused previously.  
Ÿ Adjust the volume.  
! Adjust the sound as you want. (See  
page 13.)  
11  
Selecting a track from the menu  
Selecting the playback modes  
1
2
Enter the main menu.  
1
2
Select your desired playback mode.  
7
Repeat play  
Now the 5//4 /¢ buttons work as  
the menu selecting buttons*.  
Mode  
Playback functions (as on iPod)  
Select the desired menu.  
ONE RPT : Same as “Repeat One.”  
ALL RPT  
RPT OFF  
: Same as “Repeat All.”  
: Cancels.  
7
Random play  
PLAYLIST Ô ARTISTS Ô ALBUMS Ô  
SONGS Ô GENRES Ô COMPOSER Ô  
(back to the beginning)  
Mode  
Playback functions (as on iPod)  
ALBM RND *: Same as “Shuffle Albums.”  
SONG RND : Same as “Shuffle Songs.”  
RND OFF : Cancels.  
3
Confirm the selection.  
To move back to the previous  
* Functions only if you select “ALL” in “ALBUMS” of  
menu, press 5.  
the main “MENU.”  
: Corresponding indicator lights up  
on the display  
• If a track is selected, playback starts  
automatically.  
• If the selected item has another layer, you will  
enter the layer. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until the  
desired track is played (see page 20).  
• Holding 4 /¢ can skip 10 items at  
a time.  
To check other information while listening  
to an iPod  
* The menu selecting mode will be canceled:  
– If no operations are done for about 5 seconds.  
– When you confirm the selection of a track.  
12  
Indication, [Range]  
BAS*2 (bass), [–06 to +06]  
Sound adjustments  
Adjust the bass.  
You can select a preset sound mode suitable to the  
music genre (iEQ: intelligent equalizer).  
MID*2 (mid-range), [–06 to +06]  
Adjust the mid-range frequencies sound level.  
TRE*2 (treble), [–06 to +06]  
Adjust the treble.  
FAD*3 (fader), [R06 to F06]  
Adjust the front and rear speaker balance.  
Preset values  
BAS*1 MID*2 TRE*3 S.BS*4  
BAL*4 (balance), [L06 to R06]  
Adjust the left and right speaker balance.  
S.BS*2 (super bass), [S.BS ON or S.BS OFF],  
[01 to 05, initial: 03]*5  
Maintain the richness and fullness of the bass sound  
regardless of how low you set the volume.  
Indication (For)  
USER  
(Flat sound)  
00  
00  
00  
00  
00 OFF  
+02 ON  
+03 OFF  
ROCK  
(Rock or disco music)  
+03  
+01  
SUB.W*1 (subwoofer), [00 to 08, initial: 04]  
Adjust the subwoofer output level.  
CLASSIC  
(Classical music)  
VOL (volume), [00 to 30 or 50*6]  
Adjust the volume.  
POPS  
(Light music)  
+02 +01 +02 OFF  
+04 –02 +01 ON  
1
*
Displayed only when “L/O MODE” is set to “WOOFER”  
(see page 15).  
HIP HOP  
(Funk or rap music)  
2
*
When you adjust the bass, mid-range, treble, or super  
bass, the adjustment you have made is stored for the  
currently selected sound mode (iEQ) including “USER.”  
If you are using a two-speaker system, set the fader  
level to “00.”  
This adjustment will not affect the subwoofer output.  
Range adjustment for super bass is adjustable only  
when it is set to “S.BS ON.“  
JAZZ  
(Jazz music)  
+03  
00  
+03 OFF  
3
*
*1 : Bass; *2 : Mid-range; *3 : Treble; *4 : Super bass  
4
5
*
*
Adjusting the sound  
You can adjust the sound characteristics to your  
preference.  
6
*
Depending on the amplifier gain control setting. (See  
page 15 for details.)  
1
2
13  
General settings — PSM  
You can change PSM (Preferred Setting Mode) items  
listed in the table that follows.  
3
Adjust the PSM item selected.  
1
4
5
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust other PSM  
items if necessary.  
2
Select a PSM item.  
Finish the procedure.  
Indications  
Item  
: Initial)  
Setting, [reference page]  
(
DEMO  
• DEMO ON  
:
Display demonstration will be activated automatically if no operation  
Display  
demonstration  
is done for about 20 seconds, [6].  
Cancels.  
• DEMO OFF  
• ON  
:
:
CLK DISP*1  
Clock display  
Clock time is shown on the display at all times when the power is  
turned off.  
• OFF  
:
Cancels; pressing DISP will show the clock time for about 5 seconds  
when the power is turned off, [6].  
CLOCK H  
Hour adjustment  
1 – 12  
00 – 59  
[Initial: 1 (1:00)], [6].  
[Initial: 00 (1:00)], [6].  
CLOCK M  
Minute adjustment  
DIMMER  
Dimmer  
• ON  
• OFF  
:
:
Dims the display illumination.  
Cancels.  
1
*
If the power supply is not interrupted by turning off the ignition key of your car, it is recommended to select “OFF” to  
save the car’s battery.  
14  
Indications  
Item  
Setting, [reference page]  
(
: Initial)  
SCROLL*2  
Scroll  
• ONCE  
• AUTO  
• OFF  
:
:
:
Scrolls the track information once.  
Repeats scrolling (at 5-second intervals).  
Cancels.  
• Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display  
regardless of the setting.  
L/O MODE  
Line output mode  
• REAR  
:
:
Select if the REAR LINE OUT terminals are used for connecting the  
speakers (through an external amplifier).  
Select if the REAR LINE OUT terminals are used for connecting a  
subwoofer (through an external amplifier).  
• WOOFER  
WOOFER*3  
Subwoofer cutoff  
frequency  
• LOW  
• MID  
• HIGH  
:
:
:
Frequencies lower than 90 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.  
Frequencies lower than 135 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.  
Frequencies lower than 180 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.  
AUX ADJ  
A.ADJ 00  
:
Adjust the auxiliary input level to avoid the sudden increase of the  
output level when changing the source from external component  
connected to the AUX input jack on the control panel.  
Auxiliary input level — A.ADJ 05  
adjustment  
TAG DISP  
Tag display  
• TAG ON  
• TAG OFF  
:
:
Shows the Tag information while playing MP3/WMA tracks, [10].  
Cancels.  
AMP GAIN  
Amplifier gain  
control  
• LOW PWR  
:
VOL 00 – VOL 30. (Select this if the maximum power of the speaker is  
less than 50 W to prevent damaging the speaker.)  
VOL 00 – VOL 50.  
• HIGH PWR  
• AUTO  
:
:
IF BAND  
Intermediate  
frequency band  
Increases the tuner selectivity to reduce interference noises between  
close stations. (Stereo effect may be lost.)  
Subject to interference noises from adjacent stations, but sound  
quality will not be degraded and the stereo effect will remain.  
• WIDE  
:
2
*
*
Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.  
Displayed only when “L/O MODE” is set to “WOOFER.”  
3
15  
Maintenance  
External component  
operations  
You can connect an external component to the AUX  
(auxiliary) input jack on the control panel.  
How to clean the connectors  
Frequent detachment will deteriorate the connectors.  
To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe the  
connectors with a cotton swab or cloth moistened with  
alcohol, being careful not to damage the connectors.  
Connector  
Moisture condensation  
Moisture may condense on the lens inside the unit in  
the following cases:  
• After starting the heater in the car.  
~
• If it becomes very humid inside the car.  
Should this occur, the unit may malfunction. In this  
case, eject the disc and leave the unit turned on for a  
few hours until the moisture evaporates.  
Ÿ Turn on the connected component and  
start playing the source.  
! Adjust the volume.  
How to handle discs  
When removing a disc from its  
case, press down the center holder  
of the case and lift the disc out,  
holding it by the edges.  
Center holder  
• Always hold the disc by the edges. Do not touch its  
recording surface.  
When storing a disc into its case, gently insert the  
disc around the center holder (with the printed surface  
facing up).  
Adjust the sound as you want. (See  
page 13.)  
To check other information while listening  
to an external component  
• Make sure to store discs into the cases after use.  
Clock Ô AUX IN  
16  
To keep discs clean  
More about this unit  
Basic operations  
A dirty disc may not play correctly.  
If a disc does become dirty, wipe it with  
a soft cloth in a straight line from center  
to edge.  
Turning on the power  
• Do not use any solvent (for example, conventional  
record cleaner, spray, thinner, benzine, etc.) to clean  
discs.  
• By pressing SRC on the unit, you can also turn on the  
power. If the source is ready, playback also starts.  
Turning off the power  
• If you turn off the power while listening to a track,  
playback starts from where playback it has been  
stopped previously, next time you turn on the power.  
To play new discs  
New discs may have some rough spots  
around the inner and outer edges. If  
such a disc is used, this unit may reject  
the disc.  
To remove these rough spots, rub the edges with a  
pencil or ball-point pen, etc.  
General  
• If you change the source while listening to a disc or  
an iPod, playback stops.  
Next time you select “CD” or “IPOD” as the playback  
source, playback starts from where it has been  
stopped/paused previously.  
• After ejecting a disc or disconnecting an iPod,  
“NO DISC” or “NO IPOD” appears and you cannot  
operate some of the buttons. Insert another disc,  
reconnect an iPod, or press SRC to select another  
playback source.  
Do not use the following discs:  
Warped disc  
Sticker  
Sticker residue  
Tuner operations  
Storing stations in memory  
Stick-on label  
• During SSM search...  
– All previously stored stations are erased and  
stations are stored newly.  
Unusual shape  
– Received stations are preset in No. 1 (lowest  
frequency) to No. 6 (highest frequency).  
– When SSM is over, the station stored in No. 1 will  
be automatically tuned in.  
Single CD (8 cm disc)  
• When storing a station manually, the previously  
preset station is erased when a new station is stored  
in the same preset number.  
Continued on the next page  
17  
• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:  
– Discs with stickers, labels, or a protective seal stuck  
to the surface.  
– Discs on which labels can be directly printed by an  
ink jet printer.  
Using these discs under high temperatures or high  
humidities may cause malfunctions or damage to the  
unit.  
Disc operations  
Caution for DualDisc playback  
• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply  
with the “Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard.  
Therefore, the use of Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on  
this product may not be recommended.  
General  
• This unit has been designed to reproduce CDs/CD  
Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/CD-RWs (Rewritable)  
in audio CD (CD-DA), MP3 and WMA formats.  
• When a disc is inserted upside down, “PLEASE” and  
“EJECT” appear alternately on the display. Press 0 to  
eject the disc.  
• MP3 and WMA “tracks” (words “file” and “track” are  
used interchangeably) are recorded in “folders.”  
• While fast-forwarding or reversing on an MP3 or  
WMA disc, you can only hear intermittent sounds.  
Playing an MP3/WMA disc  
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files with the  
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> (regardless of  
the letter case—upper/lower).  
• This unit can show the names of albums, artists  
(performer), and Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or  
2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.  
• This unit can display only one-byte characters. No  
other characters can be correctly displayed.  
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the  
conditions below:  
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW  
– Bit rate: 8 kbps — 320 kbps  
– Sampling frequency:  
• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.  
• This unit can play back only files of the same type  
which are first detected if a disc includes both audio  
CD (CD-DA) files and MP3/WMA files.  
• This unit can play back multi-session discs; however,  
unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.  
• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not play back on this  
unit because of their disc characteristics, or for the  
following reasons:  
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)  
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)  
– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2, Romeo,  
Joliet, Windows long file name  
• The maximum number of characters for file/folder  
names vary among the disc format used (includes 4  
extension characters—<.mp3> or <.wma>).  
– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters  
– ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters  
– Romeo: up to 128 characters  
– Discs are dirty or scratched.  
– Moisture condensation occurs on the lens inside  
the unit.  
– Joliet: up to 64 characters  
– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.  
– CD-R/CD-RW on which the files are written with  
“Packet Write” method.  
– Windows long file name: up to 128 characters  
• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files, of 200  
folders, and of 8 hierarchies.  
– There are improper recording conditions (missing  
data, etc.) or media conditions (stained, scratched,  
warped, etc.).  
CD-RWs may require a longer readout time since the  
reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than that of regular CDs.  
• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR (variable  
bit rate).  
Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in elapsed  
time display, and do not show the actual elapsed  
time. Especially, after performing the search function,  
this difference becomes noticeable.  
18  
• This unit cannot play back the following files:  
– MP3 files encoded with MP3i and MP3 PRO format.  
– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.  
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.  
– WMA files encoded with lossless, professional, and  
voice format.  
• When you turn on this unit, the iPod is charged  
through this unit.  
• While the iPod is connected, all operations from the  
iPod are disabled. Perform all operations from this  
unit.  
• While connecting an iPod with Video:  
– No video shows on the iPod’s display or the  
external monitor (only the audio part is available).  
– It is not possible to browse video files on the  
“Video“ menu. (If you connect the iPod during  
playback or pausing of a video file, resuming  
playback will not work.)  
– WMA files which are not based upon Windows  
Media Audio.  
®
– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.  
– Files which have the data such as AIFF, ATRAC3, etc.  
• The search function works but search speed is not  
constant.  
• iPod shuffle is not controllable.  
• You can control the iPod from this unit when “JVC” or  
Ejecting a disc  
” appears on the iPod display.  
• If the ejected disc is not removed within 15 seconds,  
the disc is automatically inserted again into the  
loading slot to protect it from dust. Playback starts  
automatically.  
• The songs order displayed on the selecting menu of  
this unit may differ from the iPod.  
• If playback is stopped, select a track from the  
selecting menu or press .  
• The text information may not be displayed correctly.  
– Some characters such as accented letters cannot be  
shown correctly on the display.  
– Depends on the condition of communication  
between the iPod and the unit.  
• If the text information includes more than 8  
characters, it scrolls on the display.  
This unit can display up to 40 characters.  
iPod operations  
Controllable iPod  
Software version  
iPod with dock connector  
(3rd Generation)  
2.3 or later  
iPod with Click Wheel  
(4th Generation)  
3.1 or later  
iPod mini  
iPod photo  
iPod nano  
1.4 or later  
1.2 or later  
1.0 or later  
1.0 or later  
General settings—PSM  
• If you change the “AMP GAIN” setting from  
“HIGH PWR” to “LOW PWR” while the volume level  
is set higher than “VOL 30,” the unit automatically  
changes the volume level to “VOL 30.”  
iPod with Video  
(5th Generation)  
• If your iPod software version is older than those  
mentioned above, you may not be able to control the  
iPod properly. Update your iPod to the latest software  
version before using it with this unit.  
– You can check the software version of your iPod  
from “About” in the “Setting” menu of the iPod.  
– For details about updating your iPod, visit  
<http://www.apple.com>.  
19  
Hierarchical structure of file searching when an iPod is connected  
20  
Troubleshooting  
What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service center.  
Symptoms  
Remedies/Causes  
• Sound cannot be heard from the speakers.  
• Adjust the volume to the optimum level.  
• Check the cords and connections.  
• The unit does not work at all.  
Reset the unit (see page 2).  
Store stations manually.  
• SSM automatic presetting does not work.  
• Static noise while listening to the radio.  
• Disc cannot be played back.  
Connect the antenna firmly.  
Insert the disc correctly.  
• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played back.  
• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.  
• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot be skipped. • Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component which  
you used for recording.  
• Disc can neither be played back nor ejected. • Unlock the disc (see page 9).  
• Eject the disc forcibly (see page 2).  
• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted.  
• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.  
• Change the disc.  
• Check the cords and connections.  
• “NO DISC” appears on the display.  
• Disc cannot be played back.  
Insert a playable disc into the loading slot.  
• Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in the  
format compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1, Level 2,  
Romeo, or Joliet.  
• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to the  
file names.  
• Noise is generated.  
Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not add the  
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to non-MP3 or  
WMA tracks.)  
• A longer readout time is required (“CHECK”  
keeps flashing on the display).  
Do not use too many hierarchies and folders.  
Continued on the next page  
21  
Symptoms  
Remedies/Causes  
• Tracks do not play back in the order you have Playback order is determined when the files are recorded.  
intended them to play.  
Elapsed  
playing  
time  
is  
not  
correct.This  
the tracks are recorded on the disc.  
• “PLEASE” and “EJECT“ appear alternately on Insert a disc that contains MP3/WMA tracks.  
the display.  
• Correct characters are not displayed (e.g.  
album name).  
This unit can only display letters (upper case), numbers,  
and a limited number of symbols.  
The iPod does not turn on or does not work.•  
• Update the firmware version.  
Check the connect  
Charge the battery.  
The  
sound  
is  
e and its connecthtieon.  
dist  
display.•  
“NO  
IPOD”  
Ch  
a
e
p
c
p
k
e
t
a
h
r
e
s
connecting cab  
oln  
• Charge the battery  
Playback  
stops.The  
off the unit’s power and turn it on again.  
• No sound can be heard when connecting an • Disconnect the headphones from the iPod nano.  
iPod nano.  
• Update the firmware version of the iPod nano.  
• “NO FILES” appears on the display.  
No tracks are stored. Import tracks to the iPod.  
“RESET 1”  
“RESET 7” appears on the display.Reconnect the iPod.  
• “RESET 8” appears on the display.  
Check the connecting cable and its connection  
Reset the iPod.  
• The iPod’s controls do not work after  
disconnecting from this unit.  
• Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the  
United States and/or other countries.  
• iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.  
22  
Specifications  
AUDIO AMPLIFIER SECTION  
CD PLAYER SECTION  
Maximum Power Output:  
Type:  
Compact disc player  
Front/Rear:  
Continuous Power Output (RMS):  
50 W per channel  
Signal Detection  
System:  
Non-contact optical pickup  
(semiconductor laser)  
Front/Rear:  
19 W per channel into 4 Ω,  
Number of Channels: 2 channels (stereo)  
Frequency Response: 5 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
40 Hz to 20 000 Hz at no more  
than 0.8% total harmonic  
distortion.  
Dynamic Range:  
96 dB  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio 98 dB  
Load Impedance:  
Tone Control Range:  
Bass:  
Mid-range:  
Treble:  
4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)  
Wow and Flutter:  
Less than measurable limit  
MP3 Decoding Format: (MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3)  
12 dB at 60 Hz  
12 dB at 1 kHz  
12 dB at 7.5 kHz  
Max. Bit Rate:  
320 kbps  
WMA (Windows Media® Audio) Decoding Format:  
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 70 dB  
Max. Bit Rate:  
192 kbps  
Line-Out Level/  
Impedance:  
Subwoofer-Out  
Level/Impedance:  
Output Impedance: 1 kΩ  
Other Terminal:  
2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)  
GENERAL  
Power Requirement:  
2.5 V /20 kΩ load (full scale)  
Operating Voltage: DC 14.4 V  
(11 V to 16 V allowance)  
Negative ground  
Grounding System:  
AUX (auxiliary) input jack,  
iPod jack  
Allowable Operating 0°C to +40°C  
Temperature:  
Dimensions (W × H × D): (approx.)  
TUNER SECTION  
Frequency Range:  
FM:  
Installation Size:  
Panel Size:  
182 mm × 52 mm × 150 mm  
187 mm × 58 mm × 13 mm  
87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHZ  
531 kHz to 1 602 kHz  
Mass:  
1.3 kg (excluding accessories)  
AM:  
FM Tuner  
Usable Sensitivity:  
50 dB Quieting  
Sensitivity:  
Design and specifications are subject to change without  
notice.  
11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)  
16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)  
Alternate Channel  
65 dB  
Selectivity (400 kHz):  
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 15 000 Hz  
Stereo Separation:  
30 dB  
AM Tuner  
Sensitivity:  
Selectivity:  
20 μV  
35 dB  
23  
Having TROUBLE with operation?  
Please reset your unit  
Refer to page of How to reset your unit  
EN, TH  
© 2006 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
1206DTSMDTJEIN  
KD-PDR35  
Installation/Connection Manual  
°“√µ¥µß/§¡Õ°“√µ¥µß  
1206DTSMDTJEIN  
EN, TH  
© 2006 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
GET0468-006A  
[U/UH]  
‰∑¬  
ENGLISH  
This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical systems. If your vehicle does  
not have this system, a voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC car audio dealers.  
ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π‰¥√∫°“√ÕÕ°·∫∫¡“‡æÕ„™ß“π°∫√–∫∫ °√–· ‰øø“ “¬¥π¢«≈∫°√–· µ√ß 12 ‚«≈∑ À“°√∂¬πµ¢Õߧÿ≥‰¡‰  
¥„™√–∫∫π µÕß„™‡§√Õß·ª≈ß°√–· ‰ø™«¬ ´ß “¡“√∂À“´Õ‰¥®“°√“π¢“¬‡§√Õ߇ ¬ß√∂¬πµ JVC  
§”‡µÕπ  
WARNINGS  
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery’s negative terminal and make all ‡æÕªÕß°π°“√‡°¥‰øø“≈¥«ß®√¢Õ·π–π”„Àª≈¥¢«·∫µ‡µÕ√≈∫ÕÕ°·≈«®ßµÕ “¬‰ø°Õπµ¥µß‡§√Õß  
electrical connections before installing the unit.  
Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after installation.  
µ√«® Õ∫„À·π„®«“‰¥‡¥π “¬¥πµÕ√–À«“߇§√Õß°∫µ«∂ß √∂¬πµ„À¡·≈«À≈ß®“°µ¥µß  
À¡“¬‡Àµ  
ÿ
Notes:  
Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently, consult your JVC car audio  
dealer.  
It is recommended to connect to the speakers with maximum power of more than 50 W (both at  
the rear and at the front, with an impedance of 4 to 8 ). If the maximum power is less than  
50 W, change “AMP GAIN” setting to prevent the speakers from being damaged (see page 15 of the  
INSTRUCTIONS).  
¢Õ·π–π”„ÀµÕ≈”‚æß ∑¡°”≈ߢ∫ ß  
ÿ
∂“°”≈ߢ∫µ”°«“ 50 W „À‡ª≈¬π§“ “AMP GAIN” ‡æÕªÕß°π‰¡„À≈”‚æß™”√  
ÿ
°“√ªÕß°π°“√≈¥«ß®√ ®–µÕßæ㛮 “¬µ–°« ∑‰¡„™·≈«¥«¬‡∑ ªæ𠓬‰ø  
·ºπ√–∫“¬§«“¡√Õπ®–√Õπ¡“°À≈ß®“°„™ √–¡¥√–«ßÕ¬“‰ª ¡º ‡¡Õ∂Õ¥™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π  
To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.  
The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it when removing this unit.  
Heat sink  
·ºπ√–∫“¬§«“¡√Õπ  
¢Õ§«√√–«ß ”À√∫°“√µÕ·À≈ß®“¬°”≈ß·≈–≈”‚æß:  
PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections:  
DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the car battery; otherwise, the unit  
Õ¬“µÕ “¬µ–°«‡§‡∫≈°”≈ߢÕß≈”‚æ߇¢“°∫·∫µ‡µÕ√√∂¬πµ ¡©–ππ ™ÿ  
will be seriously damaged.  
BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the speakers, check the speaker wiring in  
°Õπ∑®–µÕ “¬µ–°«‡§‡∫≈°”≈ߢÕß≈”‚æ߇¢“°∫≈”‚æß „Àµ√«® Õ∫°“√‡¥π “¬‰ø≈”‚æß„π√∂¢Õߧ  
ÿ
your car.  
Parts list for installation and connection  
The following parts are provided for this unit. If any item is missing, consult your JVC car audio dealer  
immediately.  
√“¬°“√ «πª√–°Õ∫ ”À√∫µ¥µß·≈–‡™Õ¡µÕ°π  
«πª√–°Õ∫µÕ‰ªπ„À¡“°∫™¥ÿ ª√–°Õ∫π À“°¡ ß„¥‰¡§√∫ °√ÿ≥“ª√°…“µ«·∑π®”À𓬇§√Õ߇ ¬ßµ¥√∂¬πµ JVC ‚¥¬∑π∑  
D
E
A / B  
C
Trim plate  
Power cord  
Hard case/Control panel  
Sleeve  
·ºπ‚≈À–¢Õ∫·µß  
“¬‡§‡∫≈°”≈ß  
≈ß∫√√®ÿ/À𓪥  
ª≈Õ°Àÿ¡  
F
H
I
G
Ca¬bl¥e tie¬‰ø  
Connection cable for iPod  
“¬‡™Õ¡µÕ ”À√∫ iPod  
Washer (ø5)  
ª√–‡°π«ß·À«π (ø5)  
Lock nut (M5)  
πÕµ≈Õ§ (M5)  
K
R¬ußb°bπe°rcu·shi°on  
J
L
H§πandߧles  
M
N
B·atµteµryÕ√  
Mounting bolt (M5 × 20 mm)  
Remote controller  
√‚¡µ§Õπ‚∑√≈  
≈°µ¥ (M5 × 20 ¡¡.)  
1
INSTALLATION (IN-DASH MOUNTING)  
°“√µ¥µß (°“√ª√–°Õ∫·ºßÀπ“ª∑¡‡¢“)  
The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information  
regarding installation kits, consult your JVC car audio dealer or a company supplying kits.  
If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.  
¿“浫լ“ßµÕ‰ªπ· ¥ß∂ß°“√µ¥µß·∫∫∑«‰ª À“°§  
¬ß√∂¬πµ JVC ¢Õß∑“πÀ√Õ∫√…  
™¥ª√–°Õ∫ ∂“§≥‰¡·π„®«“µ¥µß™  
ÿ
ÿ
ÿ
ÿ
ÿ
ÿ
Do the required electrical connections.  
µÕ “¬‰øµ“¡∑°”À𥉫∑ßÀ¡¥  
Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the  
sleeve firmly in place.  
ßÕ·ºπ‡æÕ¬¥ª≈Õ°„ÀµÕ°π‡¢“∑  
Removing the unit  
Before removing the unit, release the rear section.  
°“√∂Õ¥™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫  
°Õπ®–∂Õ¥™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫ „Àª≈¥Àπ“µ¥ «π∑“¬°Õπ  
Insert the two handles, then pull them as  
illustrated so that the unit can be removed.  
„ §π∫ߧ2 Õπ≈ß„π√Õß ”À√∫„™æπ≈«¥¥ß¿“殓°ππ  
„À‡≈Õπ™  
ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫ÕÕ°π¢≥–∑§Õ¬Ê¥ß§π∫ߧ∫∑ß Õß  
ÕπÕÕ°®“°°π  
When installing the unit without using the sleeve / ‡¡Õµ¥µß™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫‚¥¬‰¡„™ª≈Õ°Àÿ¡  
When using the optional stay / ‡¡Õ„™µ«¬¥·∫∫‡≈Õ°‰¥  
In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.  
Stay (option)  
µ«¬¥ (‡≈Õ°‰¥)  
µ«Õ¬“߇™π „π√∂¬πµ‚µ‚¬µ“ „À∂Õ¥«∑¬ÿµ¥√∂¬πµÕÕ°°Õπ ·≈«®ßµ¥µß‡§√Õßπ‡¢“·∑π∑  
Fire wall  
ºπß°π‰ø  
Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
°√À«‡√¬(M5 × 8 ¡¡)*2  
D·ºaßshÀbπoaªrd¡  
Bracket*2  
·∑π√Õß√∫*2  
Screw (option)  
Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
°√À«‡√¬(M5 × 8 ¡¡)*2  
°√ (‡≈Õ°‰¥)  
P°ocªket  
Bracket*2  
·∑π√Õß√∫*2  
Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚.  
µ¥µß™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫∑¡ÿ¡µ”°«“ 30˚ Õß»“  
Note  
: When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm-long screws. If longer screws are  
used, they could damage the unit.  
À¡“¬‡Àµ  
: ‡¡Õµ¥µß™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫≈ß„π·∑π√Õß√∫‰« „À„™ °√¬“«¢π“¥ 8 ¡¡. ∂“„™ °√¬“«°«“πÕ“®∑”„À™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫‡ ¬À“¬‰¥  
1
2
*1 ‡¡Õ§  
*2 ‰¡‰¥„À¡“°∫™  
ÿ≥µß™ÿ  
*
*
When you stand the unit, be careful not to damage the fuse on the rear.  
Not supplied for this unit.  
ÿ
2
ENGLISH  
‰∑¬  
°“√‡™Õ¡‚¥¬„øø“  
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS  
A
Typical connections / °“√‡™Õ¡µÕ·∫∫ª°µ  
°Õ•∑”°“•‡™•Õ¡µÕ: µ•«®†Õ•°“•‡¥•†“¬‰ø„•••¬•µÕ¬“ß•–¡¥•–«Õ¬“„Àº¥æ•“¥„•°“•‡™•Õ¡µÕ™  
ÿ
ÿ
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious  
damage to this unit.  
The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.  
°“•‡™•Õ¡µÕº¥æ•“¥Õ“®∑”„À‡°¥§«“¡‡†¬À“¬•“¬·•ß°•™ÿ¥ª•–  
°Õ••‰¥“•µ–°«¢Õ߆“¬‰ø ·•–¢ÕßÕ  
ÿ
1 µÕ “¬‰ø µ“¡≈”¥∫∑√–∫  
2 ‡™Õ¡µÕ°∫“¬Õ“°“»  
ÿ
1 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.  
2 Connect the antenna cord.  
3 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.  
3
ÿ¥∑“¬ µÕ «π§«∫§ÿ¡°“√‡¥π “¬‰ø‡¢“°∫™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫™ÿ¥π  
Loop (see diagram  
)
À«ß (¥·ºπ¿¡  
)
Rear ground terminal  
®ÿ¥‡™Õ¡µÕ “¬¥π¥“πÀ≈ß  
15 A fuse  
ø« ¢π“¥ 15 A  
Antenna terminal  
iPod jack  
(see diagram  
¢« “¬Õ“°“»  
)
À«‡≈¬∫ iPod  
Ignition switch  
«∑™®ÿ¥√–‡∫¥  
(¥·ºπ¿¡  
)
Black  
¥”  
To metallic body or chassis of the car  
µÕ°∫‚§√ß‚≈À–À√Õ‡™ ´ ¢Õß√∂¬πµ  
Line out (see diagram  
)
“¬ÕÕ° (¥·ºπ¿¡  
)
Yellow *2  
‡À≈Õß*2  
To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery  
(bypassing the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)  
µÕ°∫¢«∑¡°√–· ‰øø“„π·ºßø« ´ßµÕ°∫·∫µ‡µÕ√√∂¬πµ  
(‚¥¬‰¡µÕß„™ «∑™®ÿ¥√–‡∫¥) (12 ‚«≈∑§ß∑)  
Fuse block  
·ºßø«  
Red  
·¥ß  
To an accessory terminal in the fuse block  
µÕ°∫¢« «πª√–°Õ∫„π·ºßø«  
Blue  
»ø“  
To automatic antenna if any (250 mA max.)  
‡ “Õ“°“»‰øø“Õµ‚π¡µ À“°¡ (¢π“¥ ß ¥ 250 mA)  
Blue with white stripe  
π”‡ßπ≈“¬¢“«  
To the remote lead of other equipment (200 mA max.)  
)
µÕ‡¢“°∫Õª°√≥Õπ (¢π“¥ ß ¥ 200 mA  
Gray  
Green with black stripe  
Purple with black stripe  
Purple  
White with black stripe  
Gray with black stripe  
Green  
White  
‡∑“  
‡¢¬«·∂∫¥”  
¡«ß·∂∫¥”  
¡«ß  
¢“«·∂∫¥”  
‡∑“·∂∫¥”  
‡¢¬«  
¢“«  
Right speaker (rear)  
Right speaker (front)  
Left speaker (rear)  
Left speaker (front)  
≈”‚æߢ«“ (À≈ß)  
≈”‚æߢ«“ (Àπ“)  
≈”‚æß´“¬ (À≈ß)  
≈”‚æß´“¬ (Àπ“)  
1
2
*1 ‰¡‰¥„À¡“°∫™  
ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π  
*
*
Not supplied for this unit.  
*2 °Õπ°“√µ√«® Õ∫°“√∑”ß“π¢Õß™  
ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π°Õπ∑®–µ¥µß µÕßµÕ “¬µ–°«π°Õπ¡©–ππ®–‰¡ “¡“√∂‡ª¥‡§√Õ߉¥  
Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise power  
cannot be turned on.  
3
Connecting the external amplifier or subwoofer µÕ·Õ¡ª≈ø“¬‡ÕÕ√À√Õ´∫«ø‡øÕ√¥“ππÕ  
B
/
§
ÿ
ÿ
You can connect amplifier to upgrade your car stereo system.  
Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote lead of the other equipment so that it  
can be controlled through this unit.  
ÿ
ÿ¡‚¥¬™ÿ¥ª√–  
°Õ∫π‰¥  
Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the amplifier. Leave the speaker  
leads of this unit unused.  
∂Õ¥≈”‚æßÕÕ°®“°™  
ÿ
ÿ
Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)  
¢ÕµÕ√ªµ« Y (‰¡‰¥„À¡“°∫™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π)  
Set “L/O MODE” to “REAR” (See page 15 of the INSTRUCTIONS.)  
µß§“ “L/O MODE” ‡ªπ “REAR” (¥Àπ“ 15 §”·π–π”)  
Remote lead (Blue with white stripe)  
“¬µ–°«•–¬–‰°• ( π”‡ßπ≈“¬¢“«)  
JVC Amplifier  
‡§√Õߢ¬“¬‡ ¬ß JVC  
Rear speakers  
To the remote lead of other equipment or automatic antenna if any  
≈”‚æßÀ≈ß  
µÕ “¬°∫Õÿª°√≥ÕπÀ√Õ‡ “Õ“°“»Õµ‚π¡µ∂“¡  
Set “L/O MODE” to “WOOFER” (See page 15 of the  
INSTRUCTIONS.)  
Front speakers  
µß§“ “L/O MODE” ‡ªπ “WOOFER” (¥Àπ“ 15 §”·π–π”)  
≈”‚æßÀπ“  
or  
À√Õ  
Subwoofer  
´∫«ø‡øÕ√  
JVC Amplifier  
‡§√Õߢ¬“¬‡ ¬ß JVC  
Connecting an Apple iPod °“√‡™Õ¡µÕ°∫ Apple iPod  
C
/
Apple iPod (separately purchased)  
You can connect an iPod to this unit using the supplied connection cable for iPod.  
1 Insert the supplied cable tie across the loop.  
Apple iPod (·¬°®”Àπ“¬)  
Ca¬bl¥e tie¬‰ø  
2 Press in the head of the connection cable for iPod until you hear a clicking sound.  
3 Fasten the connection cable using the cable tie to firmly hold the connection cable in  
place.  
∑“π “¡“√∂µÕ‡§√Õ߇≈π iPod °∫‡§√Õ߇≈ππ‰¥‚¥¬„™ “¬‡§‡∫≈∑¡“°∫‡§√Õß iPod ¬¥ “¬‡§‡∫≈ ”À√  
1 Õ¥ “¬√¥ “¬‰ø∑„À¡“‡¢“‰ª„πÀ«ß  
2 °¥À«‡ ¬∫ “¬µÕ iPod ≈߉ª®π°√–∑߉¥¬π‡ ¬ß¥ß§≈°  
3 „™ “¬√¥ “¬‰ø∑§≈ÕßÕ¬°∫À«ß¬¥ “¬µÕ iPod ‰«„ÀÕ¬°∫∑  
Connection cable for iPod (supplied)  
“¬‡™Õ¡µÕ ”À√∫ iPod (¡¡“„À)  
Loop  
À«ß  
iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.  
iPod ‡ªπ‡§√ÕßÀ¡“¬°“√§“¢Õß Apple Computer, Inc. ´ß®¥∑–‡∫¬π°“√§“„πª√–‡∑» À√∞Õ‡¡√°“·≈–ª√–‡∑»ÕπÊ  
3
3
*
Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of the car—to the place uncoated with paint  
(if coated with paint, remove the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause damage to the  
unit.  
Remote lead.  
*
µÕ≈«¥ “¬¥π„À·ππ‡¢“°∫µ«∂߇À≈° À√Õµ«∂ß√∂  
µ√ß «π ∑‰¡¡ ‡§≈Õ∫ (À“°¡ ‡§≈Õ∫Õ¬ „À¢¥ ÕÕ°°Õπ °ÕπµÕ≈«¥ “¬¥π)  
À“°‰¡ªØ∫µµ“¡§”·π–π”𠇧√ÕßÕ“®™”√  
“¬µ–°«•–¬–‰°•  
ÿ¥À√Õ‡ ¬À“¬‰¥  
4
*
4
5
*
*
*5 “¬‡§‡∫≈ ≠≠“≥ (‰¡‰¥„À¡“°∫™  
ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π)  
Signal cord (not supplied for this unit).  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
°“√µ√«® Õ∫ª≠À“¢¥¢Õß  
The fuse blows.  
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?  
ø« ¢“¥  
* ¡°“√‡™Õ¡ “¬µ–°« ¥”·≈– ·¥ßÕ¬“ß∂°µÕßÀ√Õ‰¡  
Power cannot be turned on.  
* Is the yellow lead connected?  
‰¡ “¡“√∂‡ª¥‡§√Õ߉¥  
* ¡°“√‡™Õ¡ “¬µ–°« ‡À≈ÕßÀ√Õ‰¡  
No sound from the speakers.  
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?  
‰¡¡‡ ¬ßÕÕ°®“°≈”‚æß  
* “¬µ–°« «π∑ÕÕ°∑“ß≈”‚æ߇°¥‰øø“≈¥«ß®√À√Õ‰¡  
Sound is distorted.  
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?  
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?  
‡ ¬ß‡æ¬π  
* “¬µ–°« «π∑ÕÕ°∑“ß≈”‚æßµÕ≈ߥπÀ√Õ‰¡  
* “¬¢«≈∫ “–” ¢Õß≈”‚æߥ“π´“¬·≈–¢«“µÕ≈ß¥πµ“¡ª°µÀ√Õ‰¡  
Noise interfere with sounds.  
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and thicker cords?  
‡ ¬ß√∫°«π  
* ¡°“√„™ “¬ πÊ À√ÕÀπ“Ê µÕ®“°‡§√Õß «π∑µ¥µß ‰«∫πæπ¥“πÀ≈ß°∫µ«∂ß√∂¬πµÀ√Õ‰¡  
This unit becomes hot.  
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?  
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?  
ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫√Õπ¢π  
* “¬µ–°« «π∑ÕÕ°∑“ß≈”‚æßµÕ≈ߥπÀ√Õ‰¡  
* “¬¢«≈∫ “–” ¢Õß≈”‚æߥ“π´“¬·≈–¢«“µÕ≈ß¥πµ“¡ª°µÀ√Õ‰¡  
This unit does not work at all.  
* Have you reset your unit?  
‡§√Õß√∫π∑”ß“π‰¡  
* ∑“π‰¥µß‡§√Õß„À¡·≈«À√Õ¬ß  
4
CD RECEIVER  
KD-PDR35  
KD-PDR35  
ALAT PENERIMA CD  
For canceling the display demonstration, see page 6.  
Untuk membatalkan tampilan demonstrasi, lihat halaman 6.  
For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.  
Untuk instalasi dan penyambungan, lihat buku pedoman terpisah.  
INSTRUCTIONS  
BUKU PETUNJUK  
GET0468-004A  
[UN]  
Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.  
Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to obtain the best  
possible performance from the unit.  
IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS  
1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT  
2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to  
qualified service personnel.  
3. CAUTION: Visible and/or invisible class 1M laser radiation when open. Do not view directly with optical  
instruments.  
4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.  
How to reset your unit  
[European Union only]  
Warning:  
Your preset adjustments will also be erased.  
If you need to operate the unit while driving, be  
sure to look ahead carefully or you may be involved  
in a traffic accident.  
How to forcibly eject a disc  
Caution on volume setting:  
Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.  
If this does not work, reset your unit.  
Discs produce very little noise compared with other  
sources. Lower the volume before playing a disc  
to avoid damaging the speakers by the sudden  
increase of the output level.  
2
How to use the M MODE button  
CONTENTS  
If you press M MODE, the unit goes into functions mode,  
then the number buttons and 5/buttons work as  
different function buttons.  
Control panel ..................................  
Remote controller — RM-RK50...........  
4
5
Ex.: When number button 2 works as MO (monaural)  
button.  
Getting started................................  
Basic operations...................................................  
6
6
Radio operations .............................  
7
Disc operations................................  
Playing a disc in the unit .....................................  
8
8
To use these buttons for their original functions  
again after pressing M MODE, wait for 5 seconds  
without pressing any of these buttons until the  
functions mode is cleared or press M MODE again.  
iPod operations ............................... 11  
Sound adjustments.......................... 13  
General settings — PSM .................. 14  
External component operations ....... 16  
Maintenance ................................... 16  
More about this unit ........................ 17  
Troubleshooting.............................. 21  
Specifications.................................. 23  
Detaching the control panel  
For safety...  
Attaching the control panel  
• Do not raise the volume level too much, as this will  
block outside sounds, making driving dangerous.  
• Stop the car before performing any complicated  
operations.  
Temperature inside the car...  
If you have parked the car for a long time in hot or cold  
weather, wait until the temperature in the car becomes  
normal before operating the unit.  
3
Control panel  
Parts identification  
Display window  
1
Control dial  
o
;
a
s
RND (random) button  
M MODE button  
(control panel release) button  
Disc information indicators—  
TAG (Tag information), (track/file), (folder)  
DISC indicator  
Playback mode / item indicators— RND (random),  
(disc), (folder), RPT (repeat)  
Tuner reception indicators—MO (monaural),  
ST (stereo)  
2 0 (eject) button  
3
4
5
Loading slot  
EQ (equalizer) button  
DISP (display) button  
6 4 /¢ buttons  
d
f
7
8
9
Display window  
(standby/on attenuator) button  
AUX (auxiliary) input jack  
g
p 5 (up) / (down) buttons  
q
w
e
r
SEL (select) button  
BAND button  
SRC (source) button  
Remote sensor  
DO NOT expose the remote sensor to strong light  
(direct sunlight or artificial lighting).  
MO (monaural) button  
SSM (Strong-station Sequential Memory) button  
Number buttons  
h
j
k
l
/
z
S.BASS (super bass) indicator  
EQ (equalizer) indicator  
Tr (track) indicator  
Source display / Time countdown indicator  
Main display  
Sound mode (iEQ: intelligent equalizer)  
indicators—JAZZ, ROCK, HIP HOP, CLASSIC, POPS,  
USER  
t
y
u
i
RPT (repeat) button  
4
Main elements and features  
Remote controller —  
RM-RK50  
Installing the lithium coin battery  
(CR2025)  
CR2025  
Aim the remote controller directly at the remote  
sensor on the unit. Make sure there is no obstacle  
in between.  
1
(standby/on/attenuator) button  
• Turns the power on if pressed briefly or  
attenuates the sound when the power is on.  
• Turns the power off if pressed and held.  
Warning:  
2 5 U (up) / D (down) buttons  
• Changes the FM/AM bands with 5 U.  
• Changes the preset stations with D .  
• Changes the folder of the MP3/WMA discs.  
• While listening to an Apple iPod.  
– Pauses or resumes playback with D .  
– Enters the main menu with 5 U.  
(Now 5 U/D /2 R/F 3 work as the menu  
selecting buttons.)*  
• Do not install any battery other than CR2025 or its  
equivalent; otherwise, it may explode.  
• Do not leave the remote controller in a place  
(such as dashboards) exposed to direct sunlight  
for a long time; otherwise, it may explode.  
• Store the battery in a place where children cannot  
reach to avoid risk of accident.  
• To prevent the battery from over-heating,  
cracking, or starting a fire:  
– Do not recharge, short, disassemble, heat the  
battery, or dispose of it in a fire.  
3
VOL – / VOL + buttons  
• Adjusts the volume level.  
SOUND button  
4
• Selects the sound mode (iEQ: intelligent  
equalizer).  
– Do not leave the battery with other metallic  
materials.  
– Do not poke the battery with tweezers or  
similar tools.  
5
SOURCE button  
• Selects the source.  
– Wrap the battery with tape and insulate when  
throwing away or saving it.  
* 5 U : Returns to the previous menu.  
D : Confirms the selection.  
Continued on the next page  
5
6 2 R (reverse) / F (forward) 3 buttons  
• Searches for stations if pressed briefly.  
• Fast-forwards or reverses the track if pressed and  
held.  
@ Adjust the sound as you want. (See  
page 13.)  
• Changes the tracks if pressed briefly.  
• While listening to an iPod (in menu selecting  
mode):  
– Selects an item if pressed briefly. (Then, press  
D to confirm the selection.)  
To drop the volume in a  
moment (ATT)  
To restore the sound, press  
the button again.  
To turn off the power  
– Skips 10 items at a time if pressed and held.  
Getting started  
Basic settings  
Basic operations  
~ Turn on the power.  
• See also “General settings — PSM” on pages 14 and  
15.  
1
2
Ÿ
1 Canceling the display demonstrations  
Select “DEMO,” then “DEMO OFF.”  
2 Setting the clock  
Select “CLOCK H” (hour), then adjust the hour.  
Select “CLOCK M” (minute), then adjust the  
minute.  
1
*
You cannot select “CD” as the playback source  
if there is no disc in the unit.  
“NO IPOD” appears if iPod is not connected.  
2
*
3
Finish the procedure.  
! For FM/AM tuner  
To check the current clock time while the  
power is turned off  
Adjust the volume.  
Clock time is shown on the display for  
about 5 seconds. See also page 14.  
VOL 20  
Volume level appears.  
6
When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to  
receive  
Radio operations  
~
Lights up when monaural mode is activated.  
Ÿ
MONO  
Lights up when receiving an FM stereo  
broadcast with sufficient signal strength.  
Reception improves, but stereo effect will be lost.  
To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same  
procedure. “MONO OFF” appears and the MO indicator  
goes off.  
88.3  
! Start searching for a station.  
Storing stations in memory  
You can preset six stations for each band.  
When a station is received, searching stops.  
To stop searching, press the same button  
again.  
FM station automatic presetting—  
SSM (Strong-station Sequential  
Memory)  
1
Select the FM band (FM1 – FM3) you want to  
store into.  
To tune in to a station manually  
In step ! above...  
1
2
3
M
2
Select a desired station frequency.  
SSM  
“SSM” flashes, then disappears when automatic  
presetting is over.  
Local FM stations with the strongest signals are  
searched and stored automatically in the FM band.  
7
Manual presetting  
Ex.: Storing FM station of 92.5 MHz into preset  
number 4 of the FM1 band.  
Disc operations  
Playing a disc in the unit  
All tracks will be played repeatedly until you change the  
source or eject the disc.  
1
2
FM I 92.5  
3
P4  
92.5  
Preset number flashes for a while.  
To stop play and eject the disc  
• Press SRC to listen to another  
playback source.  
Listening to a preset station  
1
2
To fast-forward or reverse the track  
To go to the next or previous tracks  
Select the preset station (1 – 6) you want.  
or  
To go to the next or previous folders (only for  
MP3 or WMA discs)  
To check other information while listening  
to the radio  
Clock Ô Frequency  
8
To locate a particular track (for CD) or folder  
(for MP3 or WMA discs) directly  
Other main functions  
To select a number from 01 – 06:  
Skipping tracks quickly during play  
• For MP3 or WMA discs, you can skip tracks within the  
same folder.  
To select a number from 07 – 12:  
Ex.: To select track 32 while playing a track whose  
number is a single digit (1 to 9)  
1
2
• To use direct folder access on MP3/WMA discs, it  
is required that folders are assigned with 2-digit  
numbers at the beginning of their folder names—  
01, 02, 03, and so on.  
Each time you press the button, you can skip 10  
tracks.  
To select a particular track in a folder  
(for MP3 or WMA discs):  
• After the last track, the first track will be selected  
and vice versa.  
3
Prohibiting disc ejection  
You can lock a disc in the loading slot.  
NO EJECT  
To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same  
procedure.  
9
Changing the display information  
While playing an audio CD or a CD Text  
Selecting the playback modes  
You can use only one of the following playback modes  
at a time.  
1
2
Select your desired playback mode.  
Repeat play  
7
While playing an MP3 or a WMA track  
• When “TAG DISP” is set to “TAG ON”  
(see page 15)  
Mode  
Plays repeatedly  
TRK RPT  
: The current track.  
FLDR RPT* : All tracks of the current folder.  
RPT OFF  
: Cancels.  
7
Random play  
Mode  
Plays at random  
• When “TAG DISP” is set to “TAG OFF”  
FLDR RND* : All tracks of the current folder,  
then tracks of the next folder  
and so on.  
DISC RND  
: All tracks of the current disc.  
RND OFF  
: Cancels.  
: Clock with the current track number  
: Elapsed playing time with the current  
track number  
: Corresponding indicator lights up on  
the display  
* Only while playing an MP3 or a WMA disc.  
: Corresponding indicator lights up  
on the display  
1
2
*
*
If the current disc is an audio CD, “NO NAME” appears.  
If an MP3/WMA file does not have Tag information,  
folder name and file name appear. In this case, the  
TAG indicator will not light up.  
10  
Caution:  
iPod operations  
You can play songs from an Apple iPod through this unit  
by connecting it with the supplied connection cable for  
iPod.  
• Avoid using the iPod if it might hinder your safety  
driving.  
• Make sure all important data has been backed up  
to avoid losing the data.  
• Disconnecting the iPod will stop playback. Press SRC  
to listen to another playback source.  
To pause playback  
• For connection, see Installation/Connection Manual  
(separate volume).  
To resume playback, press the  
button again.  
• For details, refer also to the manual supplied with  
your iPod.  
~ Connect an iPod.  
To fast-forward or reverse the track  
To go to the next or previous tracks  
Connection cable for iPod  
If an iPod has been connected...  
Playback starts automatically from where it has  
been paused previously.  
Ÿ Adjust the volume.  
! Adjust the sound as you want. (See  
page 13.)  
11  
Selecting a track from the menu  
Selecting the playback modes  
1
2
Enter the main menu.  
1
2
Select your desired playback mode.  
7
Repeat play  
Now the 5//4 /¢ buttons work as  
the menu selecting buttons*.  
Mode  
Playback functions (as on iPod)  
Select the desired menu.  
ONE RPT : Same as “Repeat One.”  
ALL RPT  
RPT OFF  
: Same as “Repeat All.”  
: Cancels.  
7
Random play  
PLAYLIST Ô ARTISTS Ô ALBUMS Ô  
SONGS Ô GENRES Ô COMPOSER Ô  
(back to the beginning)  
Mode  
Playback functions (as on iPod)  
ALBM RND *: Same as “Shuffle Albums.”  
SONG RND : Same as “Shuffle Songs.”  
RND OFF : Cancels.  
3
Confirm the selection.  
To move back to the previous  
* Functions only if you select “ALL” in “ALBUMS” of  
menu, press 5.  
the main “MENU.”  
: Corresponding indicator lights up  
on the display  
• If a track is selected, playback starts  
automatically.  
• If the selected item has another layer, you will  
enter the layer. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until the  
desired track is played (see page 20).  
• Holding 4 /¢ can skip 10 items at  
a time.  
To check other information while listening  
to an iPod  
* The menu selecting mode will be canceled:  
– If no operations are done for about 5 seconds.  
– When you confirm the selection of a track.  
12  
Indication, [Range]  
BAS*2 (bass), [–06 to +06]  
Sound adjustments  
Adjust the bass.  
You can select a preset sound mode suitable to the  
music genre (iEQ: intelligent equalizer).  
MID*2 (mid-range), [–06 to +06]  
Adjust the mid-range frequencies sound level.  
TRE*2 (treble), [–06 to +06]  
Adjust the treble.  
FAD*3 (fader), [R06 to F06]  
Adjust the front and rear speaker balance.  
Preset values  
BAS*1 MID*2 TRE*3 S.BS*4  
BAL*4 (balance), [L06 to R06]  
Adjust the left and right speaker balance.  
S.BS*2 (super bass), [S.BS ON or S.BS OFF],  
[01 to 05, initial: 03]*5  
Maintain the richness and fullness of the bass sound  
regardless of how low you set the volume.  
Indication (For)  
USER  
(Flat sound)  
00  
00  
00  
00  
00 OFF  
+02 ON  
+03 OFF  
ROCK  
(Rock or disco music)  
+03  
+01  
SUB.W*1 (subwoofer), [00 to 08, initial: 04]  
Adjust the subwoofer output level.  
CLASSIC  
(Classical music)  
VOL (volume), [00 to 30 or 50*6]  
Adjust the volume.  
POPS  
(Light music)  
+02 +01 +02 OFF  
+04 –02 +01 ON  
1
*
Displayed only when “L/O MODE” is set to “WOOFER”  
(see page 15).  
HIP HOP  
(Funk or rap music)  
2
*
When you adjust the bass, mid-range, treble, or super  
bass, the adjustment you have made is stored for the  
currently selected sound mode (iEQ) including “USER.”  
If you are using a two-speaker system, set the fader  
level to “00.”  
This adjustment will not affect the subwoofer output.  
Range adjustment for super bass is adjustable only  
when it is set to “S.BS ON.“  
JAZZ  
(Jazz music)  
+03  
00  
+03 OFF  
3
*
*1 : Bass; *2 : Mid-range; *3 : Treble; *4 : Super bass  
4
5
*
*
Adjusting the sound  
You can adjust the sound characteristics to your  
preference.  
6
*
Depending on the amplifier gain control setting. (See  
page 15 for details.)  
1
2
13  
General settings — PSM  
You can change PSM (Preferred Setting Mode) items  
listed in the table that follows.  
3
Adjust the PSM item selected.  
1
4
5
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust other PSM  
items if necessary.  
2
Select a PSM item.  
Finish the procedure.  
Indications  
Item  
: Initial)  
Setting, [reference page]  
(
DEMO  
• DEMO ON  
:
Display demonstration will be activated automatically if no operation  
Display  
demonstration  
is done for about 20 seconds, [6].  
Cancels.  
• DEMO OFF  
• ON  
:
:
CLK DISP*1  
Clock display  
Clock time is shown on the display at all times when the power is  
turned off.  
• OFF  
:
Cancels; pressing DISP will show the clock time for about 5 seconds  
when the power is turned off, [6].  
CLOCK H  
Hour adjustment  
1 – 12  
00 – 59  
[Initial: 1 (1:00)], [6].  
[Initial: 00 (1:00)], [6].  
CLOCK M  
Minute adjustment  
DIMMER  
Dimmer  
• ON  
• OFF  
:
:
Dims the display illumination.  
Cancels.  
1
*
If the power supply is not interrupted by turning off the ignition key of your car, it is recommended to select “OFF” to  
save the car’s battery.  
14  
Indications  
Item  
Setting, [reference page]  
(
: Initial)  
SCROLL*2  
Scroll  
• ONCE  
• AUTO  
• OFF  
:
:
:
Scrolls the track information once.  
Repeats scrolling (at 5-second intervals).  
Cancels.  
• Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display  
regardless of the setting.  
L/O MODE  
Line output mode  
• REAR  
:
:
Select if the REAR LINE OUT terminals are used for connecting the  
speakers (through an external amplifier).  
Select if the REAR LINE OUT terminals are used for connecting a  
subwoofer (through an external amplifier).  
• WOOFER  
WOOFER*3  
Subwoofer cutoff  
frequency  
• LOW  
• MID  
• HIGH  
:
:
:
Frequencies lower than 90 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.  
Frequencies lower than 135 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.  
Frequencies lower than 180 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.  
AUX ADJ  
A.ADJ 00  
:
Adjust the auxiliary input level to avoid the sudden increase of the  
output level when changing the source from external component  
connected to the AUX input jack on the control panel.  
Auxiliary input level — A.ADJ 05  
adjustment  
TAG DISP  
Tag display  
• TAG ON  
• TAG OFF  
:
:
Shows the Tag information while playing MP3/WMA tracks, [10].  
Cancels.  
AMP GAIN  
Amplifier gain  
control  
• LOW PWR  
:
VOL 00 – VOL 30. (Select this if the maximum power of the speaker is  
less than 50 W to prevent damaging the speaker.)  
VOL 00 – VOL 50.  
• HIGH PWR  
• AUTO  
:
:
IF BAND  
Intermediate  
frequency band  
Increases the tuner selectivity to reduce interference noises between  
close stations. (Stereo effect may be lost.)  
Subject to interference noises from adjacent stations, but sound  
quality will not be degraded and the stereo effect will remain.  
• WIDE  
:
2
*
*
Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.  
Displayed only when “L/O MODE” is set to “WOOFER.”  
3
15  
Maintenance  
External component  
operations  
You can connect an external component to the AUX  
(auxiliary) input jack on the control panel.  
How to clean the connectors  
Frequent detachment will deteriorate the connectors.  
To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe the  
connectors with a cotton swab or cloth moistened with  
alcohol, being careful not to damage the connectors.  
Connector  
Moisture condensation  
Moisture may condense on the lens inside the unit in  
the following cases:  
• After starting the heater in the car.  
~
• If it becomes very humid inside the car.  
Should this occur, the unit may malfunction. In this  
case, eject the disc and leave the unit turned on for a  
few hours until the moisture evaporates.  
Ÿ Turn on the connected component and  
start playing the source.  
! Adjust the volume.  
How to handle discs  
When removing a disc from its  
case, press down the center holder  
of the case and lift the disc out,  
holding it by the edges.  
Center holder  
• Always hold the disc by the edges. Do not touch its  
recording surface.  
When storing a disc into its case, gently insert the  
disc around the center holder (with the printed surface  
facing up).  
Adjust the sound as you want. (See  
page 13.)  
To check other information while listening  
to an external component  
• Make sure to store discs into the cases after use.  
Clock Ô AUX IN  
16  
To keep discs clean  
More about this unit  
Basic operations  
A dirty disc may not play correctly.  
If a disc does become dirty, wipe it with  
a soft cloth in a straight line from center  
to edge.  
Turning on the power  
• Do not use any solvent (for example, conventional  
record cleaner, spray, thinner, benzine, etc.) to clean  
discs.  
• By pressing SRC on the unit, you can also turn on the  
power. If the source is ready, playback also starts.  
Turning off the power  
• If you turn off the power while listening to a track,  
playback starts from where playback it has been  
stopped previously, next time you turn on the power.  
To play new discs  
New discs may have some rough spots  
around the inner and outer edges. If  
such a disc is used, this unit may reject  
the disc.  
To remove these rough spots, rub the edges with a  
pencil or ball-point pen, etc.  
General  
• If you change the source while listening to a disc or  
an iPod, playback stops.  
Next time you select “CD” or “IPOD” as the playback  
source, playback starts from where it has been  
stopped/paused previously.  
• After ejecting a disc or disconnecting an iPod,  
“NO DISC” or “NO IPOD” appears and you cannot  
operate some of the buttons. Insert another disc,  
reconnect an iPod, or press SRC to select another  
playback source.  
Do not use the following discs:  
Warped disc  
Sticker  
Sticker residue  
Tuner operations  
Storing stations in memory  
Stick-on label  
• During SSM search...  
– All previously stored stations are erased and  
stations are stored newly.  
Unusual shape  
– Received stations are preset in No. 1 (lowest  
frequency) to No. 6 (highest frequency).  
– When SSM is over, the station stored in No. 1 will  
be automatically tuned in.  
Single CD (8 cm disc)  
• When storing a station manually, the previously  
preset station is erased when a new station is stored  
in the same preset number.  
Continued on the next page  
17  
• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:  
– Discs with stickers, labels, or a protective seal stuck  
to the surface.  
– Discs on which labels can be directly printed by an  
ink jet printer.  
Using these discs under high temperatures or high  
humidities may cause malfunctions or damage to the  
unit.  
Disc operations  
Caution for DualDisc playback  
• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply  
with the “Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard.  
Therefore, the use of Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on  
this product may not be recommended.  
General  
• This unit has been designed to reproduce CDs/CD  
Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/CD-RWs (Rewritable)  
in audio CD (CD-DA), MP3 and WMA formats.  
• When a disc is inserted upside down, “PLEASE” and  
“EJECT” appear alternately on the display. Press 0 to  
eject the disc.  
• MP3 and WMA “tracks” (words “file” and “track” are  
used interchangeably) are recorded in “folders.”  
• While fast-forwarding or reversing on an MP3 or  
WMA disc, you can only hear intermittent sounds.  
Playing an MP3/WMA disc  
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files with the  
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> (regardless of  
the letter case—upper/lower).  
• This unit can show the names of albums, artists  
(performer), and Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or  
2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.  
• This unit can display only one-byte characters. No  
other characters can be correctly displayed.  
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the  
conditions below:  
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW  
– Bit rate: 8 kbps — 320 kbps  
– Sampling frequency:  
• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.  
• This unit can play back only files of the same type  
which are first detected if a disc includes both audio  
CD (CD-DA) files and MP3/WMA files.  
• This unit can play back multi-session discs; however,  
unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.  
• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not play back on this  
unit because of their disc characteristics, or for the  
following reasons:  
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)  
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)  
– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2, Romeo,  
Joliet, Windows long file name  
• The maximum number of characters for file/folder  
names vary among the disc format used (includes 4  
extension characters—<.mp3> or <.wma>).  
– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters  
– ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters  
– Romeo: up to 128 characters  
– Discs are dirty or scratched.  
– Moisture condensation occurs on the lens inside  
the unit.  
– Joliet: up to 64 characters  
– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.  
– CD-R/CD-RW on which the files are written with  
“Packet Write” method.  
– Windows long file name: up to 128 characters  
• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files, of 200  
folders, and of 8 hierarchies.  
– There are improper recording conditions (missing  
data, etc.) or media conditions (stained, scratched,  
warped, etc.).  
CD-RWs may require a longer readout time since the  
reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than that of regular CDs.  
• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR (variable  
bit rate).  
Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in elapsed  
time display, and do not show the actual elapsed  
time. Especially, after performing the search function,  
this difference becomes noticeable.  
18  
• This unit cannot play back the following files:  
– MP3 files encoded with MP3i and MP3 PRO format.  
– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.  
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.  
– WMA files encoded with lossless, professional, and  
voice format.  
• When you turn on this unit, the iPod is charged  
through this unit.  
• While the iPod is connected, all operations from the  
iPod are disabled. Perform all operations from this  
unit.  
• While connecting an iPod with Video:  
– No video shows on the iPod’s display or the  
external monitor (only the audio part is available).  
– It is not possible to browse video files on the  
“Video“ menu. (If you connect the iPod during  
playback or pausing of a video file, resuming  
playback will not work.)  
– WMA files which are not based upon Windows  
Media Audio.  
®
– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.  
– Files which have the data such as AIFF, ATRAC3, etc.  
• The search function works but search speed is not  
constant.  
• iPod shuffle is not controllable.  
• You can control the iPod from this unit when “JVC” or  
Ejecting a disc  
” appears on the iPod display.  
• If the ejected disc is not removed within 15 seconds,  
the disc is automatically inserted again into the  
loading slot to protect it from dust. Playback starts  
automatically.  
• The songs order displayed on the selecting menu of  
this unit may differ from the iPod.  
• If playback is stopped, select a track from the  
selecting menu or press .  
• The text information may not be displayed correctly.  
– Some characters such as accented letters cannot be  
shown correctly on the display.  
– Depends on the condition of communication  
between the iPod and the unit.  
• If the text information includes more than 8  
characters, it scrolls on the display.  
This unit can display up to 40 characters.  
iPod operations  
Controllable iPod  
Software version  
iPod with dock connector  
(3rd Generation)  
2.3 or later  
iPod with Click Wheel  
(4th Generation)  
3.1 or later  
iPod mini  
iPod photo  
iPod nano  
1.4 or later  
1.2 or later  
1.0 or later  
1.0 or later  
General settings—PSM  
• If you change the “AMP GAIN” setting from  
“HIGH PWR” to “LOW PWR” while the volume level  
is set higher than “VOL 30,” the unit automatically  
changes the volume level to “VOL 30.”  
iPod with Video  
(5th Generation)  
• If your iPod software version is older than those  
mentioned above, you may not be able to control the  
iPod properly. Update your iPod to the latest software  
version before using it with this unit.  
– You can check the software version of your iPod  
from “About” in the “Setting” menu of the iPod.  
– For details about updating your iPod, visit  
<http://www.apple.com>.  
19  
Hierarchical structure of file searching when an iPod is connected  
20  
Troubleshooting  
What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service center.  
Symptoms  
Remedies/Causes  
• Sound cannot be heard from the speakers.  
• Adjust the volume to the optimum level.  
• Check the cords and connections.  
• The unit does not work at all.  
Reset the unit (see page 2).  
Store stations manually.  
• SSM automatic presetting does not work.  
• Static noise while listening to the radio.  
• Disc cannot be played back.  
Connect the antenna firmly.  
Insert the disc correctly.  
• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played back.  
• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.  
• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot be skipped. • Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component which  
you used for recording.  
• Disc can neither be played back nor ejected. • Unlock the disc (see page 9).  
• Eject the disc forcibly (see page 2).  
• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted.  
• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.  
• Change the disc.  
• Check the cords and connections.  
• “NO DISC” appears on the display.  
• Disc cannot be played back.  
Insert a playable disc into the loading slot.  
• Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in the  
format compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1, Level 2,  
Romeo, or Joliet.  
• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to the  
file names.  
• Noise is generated.  
Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not add the  
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to non-MP3 or  
WMA tracks.)  
• A longer readout time is required (“CHECK”  
keeps flashing on the display).  
Do not use too many hierarchies and folders.  
Continued on the next page  
21  
Symptoms  
Remedies/Causes  
• Tracks do not play back in the order you have Playback order is determined when the files are recorded.  
intended them to play.  
Elapsed  
playing  
time  
is  
not  
correct.This  
the tracks are recorded on the disc.  
• “PLEASE” and “EJECT“ appear alternately on Insert a disc that contains MP3/WMA tracks.  
the display.  
• Correct characters are not displayed (e.g.  
album name).  
This unit can only display letters (upper case), numbers,  
and a limited number of symbols.  
The iPod does not turn on or does not work.•  
• Update the firmware version.  
Check the connecti  
Charge the battery.  
The  
sound  
is  
e and its connecthtieon.  
dist  
display.•  
“NO  
IPOD”  
Ch  
a
e
p
c
p
k
e
t
a
h
r
e
s
connecting cab  
oln  
• Charge the battery  
Playback  
stops.The  
off the unit’s power and turn it on again.  
• No sound can be heard when connecting an • Disconnect the headphones from the iPod nano.  
iPod nano.  
• Update the firmware version of the iPod nano.  
• “NO FILES” appears on the display.  
No tracks are stored. Import tracks to the iPod.  
“RESET 1”  
“RESET 7” appears on the display.Reconnect the iPod.  
• “RESET 8” appears on the display.  
Check the connecting cable and its connection  
Reset the iPod.  
• The iPod’s controls do not work after  
disconnecting from this unit.  
• Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the  
United States and/or other countries.  
• iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.  
22  
Specifications  
AUDIO AMPLIFIER SECTION  
CD PLAYER SECTION  
Maximum Power Output:  
Type:  
Compact disc player  
Front/Rear:  
Continuous Power Output (RMS):  
50 W per channel  
Signal Detection  
System:  
Non-contact optical pickup  
(semiconductor laser)  
Front/Rear:  
19 W per channel into 4 Ω,  
Number of Channels: 2 channels (stereo)  
Frequency Response: 5 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
40 Hz to 20 000 Hz at no more  
than 0.8% total harmonic  
distortion.  
Dynamic Range:  
96 dB  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio 98 dB  
Load Impedance:  
Tone Control Range:  
Bass:  
Mid-range:  
Treble:  
4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)  
Wow and Flutter:  
Less than measurable limit  
MP3 Decoding Format: (MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3)  
12 dB at 60 Hz  
12 dB at 1 kHz  
12 dB at 7.5 kHz  
Max. Bit Rate:  
320 kbps  
WMA (Windows Media® Audio) Decoding Format:  
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 70 dB  
Max. Bit Rate:  
192 kbps  
Line-Out Level/  
Impedance:  
Subwoofer-Out  
Level/Impedance:  
Output Impedance: 1 kΩ  
Other Terminal:  
2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)  
GENERAL  
Power Requirement:  
2.5 V /20 kΩ load (full scale)  
Operating Voltage: DC 14.4 V  
(11 V to 16 V allowance)  
Negative ground  
Grounding System:  
AUX (auxiliary) input jack,  
iPod jack  
Allowable Operating 0°C to +40°C  
Temperature:  
Dimensions (W × H × D): (approx.)  
TUNER SECTION  
Frequency Range:  
FM:  
Installation Size:  
Panel Size:  
182 mm × 52 mm × 150 mm  
187 mm × 58 mm × 13 mm  
87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHZ  
531 kHz to 1 602 kHz  
Mass:  
1.3 kg (excluding accessories)  
AM:  
FM Tuner  
Usable Sensitivity:  
50 dB Quieting  
Sensitivity:  
Design and specifications are subject to change without  
notice.  
11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)  
16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)  
Alternate Channel  
65 dB  
Selectivity (400 kHz):  
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 15 000 Hz  
Stereo Separation:  
30 dB  
AM Tuner  
Sensitivity:  
Selectivity:  
20 μV  
35 dB  
23  
Having TROUBLE with operation?  
Please reset your unit  
Refer to page of How to reset your unit  
Ada MASALAH dengan cara  
pengoperasian?  
Setel kembali unit Anda  
Lihat halaman mengenai Bagaimana mereset unit anda  
EN, IN  
© 2006 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
1206DTSMDTJEIN  
KD-PDR35  
Installation/Connection Manual  
Manual Pemasangan/Penyambungan  
1206DTSMDTJEIN  
EN, IN  
© 2006 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
GET0468-009A  
[UN]  
INDONESIA  
ENGLISH  
Alat penerima ini didisain untuk beroperasi hanya pada 12 V DC, sistem listrik tanah NEGATIVE. Jika  
kendaraan anda tidak memiliki sistem ini, sebuah pembalik tegangan diperlukan, yang mana dapat dibeli  
di penyalur-penyalur audio mobil JVC.  
This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical systems. If your vehicle does  
not have this system, a voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC car audio dealers.  
PERINGATAN  
WARNINGS  
Untuk mencegah hubungan pendek, kami menyarankan anda memutuskan sambungan terminal negatif  
baterai dan membuat semua sambungan-sambungan listrik sebelum memasang alat penerima.  
• Pastikan untuk mentanahkan alat penerima ini ke casis mobil kembali setelah pemasangan.  
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery’s negative terminal and make all  
electrical connections before installing the unit.  
Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after installation.  
Catatan:  
Notes:  
Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently, consult your JVC car audio  
dealer.  
Ganti sekring dengan voltase yang sudah ditetapkan. Jika sekring sering meledak, konsultasikan pada  
penyalur audio mobil JVC anda.  
It is recommended to connect to the speakers with maximum power of more than 50 W (both at  
the rear and at the front, with an impedance of 4 to 8 ). If the maximum power is less than  
50 W, change “AMP GAIN” setting to prevent the speakers from being damaged (see page 15 of the  
INSTRUCTIONS).  
To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.  
The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it when removing this unit.  
Disarankan untuk menghubungkan speaker-speaker dengan maksimum power lebih dari 50 W (keduanya  
di belakang dan di depan, dengan sebuah impedansi 4 sampai 8 ). Jika maksimum power kurang  
dari 50 W, ganti pengaturan “AMP GAIN” (“PENAMBAH PENGUAT”) untuk mencegah speaker-speaker  
dari kerusakan (lihat halaman 15 dari BUKU PETUNJUK).  
Untuk mencegah hubungan pendek, tutup ujung-ujung terminal-terminal TIDAK DIGUNAKAN dengan  
pita isolasi.  
Pendingin menjadi sangat panas setelah digunakan. Hati-hati untuk tidak menyentuhnya ketika  
memindahkan alat penerima ini.  
Heat sink  
Pendingin  
TINDAKAN-TINDAKAN PENCEGAHAN pada suplai power dan  
sambungan-sambungan speaker:  
• JANGAN sambungkan ujung-ujung speaker dari kabel power ke baterai mobil; sebaliknya,  
alat penerima tersebut akan secara serius rusak.  
SEBELUM menyambung ujung-ujung speaker dari kabel power ke speaker-speaker, cek perkabelan  
speaker dalam mobil anda.  
PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections:  
DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the car battery; otherwise, the unit  
will be seriously damaged.  
BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the speakers, check the speaker wiring in  
your car.  
Daftar bagian-bagian untuk pemasangan dan penyambungan  
Parts list for installation and connection  
Bagian-bagian berikut disediakan untuk alat penerima ini. Jika ada bagian yang hilang, segera hubungi  
dealer audio mobil JVC anda.  
The following parts are provided for this unit. If any item is missing, consult your JVC car audio dealer  
immediately.  
A / B  
C
D
E
Hard case/Control panel  
Kotak keras/Panel kontrol  
Sleeve  
Selongsong  
Trim plate  
Plat rapi  
Power cord  
Kabel power  
F
G
H
I
Connection cable for iPod  
Kabel koneksi untuk iPod  
Cable tie  
Ikat kable  
Washer (ø5)  
Perapat sambungan (ø5)  
Lock nut (M5)  
Mur kunci (M5)  
J
K
L
M
N
Handles  
Pegangan-pegangan  
Remote controller  
Pengontrol jauh  
Battery  
Baterai  
Mounting bolt (M5 × 20 mm)  
Baut bingkai (M5 × 20 mm)  
Rubber cushion  
Bantalan karet  
1
INSTALLATION (IN-DASH MOUNTING)  
The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information  
regarding installation kits, consult your JVC car audio dealer or a company supplying kits.  
If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.  
PEMASANGAN (BINGKAI-DALAM DASH)  
Ilustrasi berikut menunjukkan sebuah tipe pemasangan. Jika anda mempunyai suatu pertanyaan atau  
informasi yang diperlukan mengenai alat-alat pemasangan, konsultasikan pada penyalur audio mobil JVC  
atau sebuah perusahaan yang mensuplai alat-alat.  
Jika anda tidak yakin bagaimana memasang alat penerima ini dengan benar, biarkan dipasang dengan  
teknisi yang berkualitas.  
Do the required electrical connections.  
Lakukan penyambungan-penyambungan  
listrik yang diperlukan.  
Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the  
sleeve firmly in place.  
Bengkokkan pengait-pengait yang tepat  
untuk menahan selongsong secara kuat  
pada tempatnya.  
Removing the unit  
Memindahkan alat penerima  
Before removing the unit, release the rear section.  
Sebelum memindahkan alat penerima, lepaskan seksi belakang.  
Insert the two handles, then pull them as  
illustrated so that the unit can be removed.  
Sisipkan kedua pemegang dan tarik pemegang  
seperti yang diilustrasikan hingga alat penerima  
dapat dipindahkan.  
When using the optional stay / Ketika menggunakan  
penguat tambahan  
When installing the unit without using the sleeve / Ketika memasang alat penerima  
tanpa menggunakan selongsong  
In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.  
Dalam sebuah kereta Toyota misalnya, pertama pindahkan radio mobil dan pasang alat penerima tersebut ke dalam tempatnya.  
Stay (option)  
Penguat (tambahan)  
Fire wall  
Dinding tahan api  
Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
Sekrup-sekrup tipe rata (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
Dashboard  
Tempat alat pada bagian  
depan  
Bracket*2  
Breket*2  
Screw (option)  
Sekrup (tambahan)  
Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
Sekrup-sekrup tipe rata (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
Pocket  
Kantong  
Bracket*2  
Breket*2  
Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚.  
Pasang penerima pada suatu sudut kurang  
dari 30˚.  
Note  
: When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm -long screws. If longer screws are  
used, they could damage the unit.  
: Ketika memasang alat penerima pada breket bingkai, pastikan untuk menggunakan sekrup-sekrup panjang–  
8 mm. Jika sekrup yang lebih panjang digunakan, maka dapat merusak alat penerima.  
Catatan  
1
1
*
*
When you stand the unit, be careful not to damage the fuse on the rear.  
Not supplied for this unit.  
*
*
Ketika anda memberdirikan alat penerima, hati-hati untuk tidak merusak sekring di belakang.  
Tidak disediakan untuk alat penerima ini.  
2
2
2
ENGLISH  
INDONESIA  
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS  
SAMBUNGAN-SAMBUNGAN LISTRIK  
A
Typical connections / Ciri khas sambungan-sambungan  
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious  
damage to this unit.  
The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.  
Sebelum penyambungan: Cek perkabelan dalam mobil dengan hati-hati. Penyambungan yang tidak  
benar mungkin menyebabkan kerusakan serius pada alat penerima.  
Ujung dari kabel power dan beberapa konektor dari bodi mobil mungkin berbeda dalam warna.  
1 Sambungkan ujung berwarna dari kabel power dalam urutan spesifikasi pada ilustrasi di bawah.  
2 Sambungkan kabel antena.  
1 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.  
2 Connect the antenna cord.  
3 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.  
3 Akhirnya sambungkan dudukan kabel ke alat penerima.  
Loop (see diagram  
Loop (lihat diagram  
)
)
Rear ground terminal  
Terminal tanah belakang  
15 A fuse  
Sekring 15 A  
Antenna terminal  
Terminal antena  
iPod jack  
(see diagram  
Jack iPod  
)
Ignition switch  
Saklar kontak  
(lihat diagram  
)
Black  
Hitam  
To metallic body or chassis of the car  
Ke besi bodi atau casis dari mobil tersebut  
Line out (see diagram  
)
Keluaran (lihat diagram  
)
Yellow *2  
Kuning *2  
To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery  
(bypassing the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)  
Ke sebuah tempat terminal dalam blok sekring disambungkan ke baterai  
mobil (abaikan saklar kontak) (konstant 12 V)  
Fuse block  
Blok sekring  
Red  
Merah  
To an accessory terminal in the fuse block  
Ke sebuah terminal aksesoris dalam blok sekring  
Blue  
Biru  
To the automatic antenna if any (250 mA max.)  
Ke antena otomatis jika ada (maksimum 250 mA)  
Blue with white stripe  
Biru dengan strip putih  
To the remote lead of other equipment (200 mA max.)  
Ke ujung jauh dari peralatan lain (maksimum 200 mA)  
White with black stripe  
Putih dengan strip hitam  
Gray with black stripe  
Abu-abu dengan strip hitam  
Gray  
Abu-abu  
Green with black stripe  
Hijau dengan strip hitam  
Green  
Hijau  
Purple with black stripe  
Ungu dengan strip hitam  
Purple  
Ungu  
White  
Putih  
Left speaker (front)  
Speaker kiri (depan)  
Right speaker (front)  
Speaker kanan (depan)  
Left speaker (rear)  
Speaker kiri (belakang)  
Right speaker (rear)  
Speaker kanan (belakang)  
1
1
2
*
*
Not supplied for this unit.  
*
*
Tidak disediakan untuk alat penerima ini.  
Sebelum pengecekan pengoperasian dari alat penerima ini sebelum pemasangan, ujung ini harus sudah  
dihubungkan, selain itu power tidak dapat dihidupkan.  
2
Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise power  
cannot be turned on.  
3
Connecting the external amplifier or subwoofer Penyambungan penguat eksternal atau subwoofer  
B
/
You can connect an amplifier to upgrade your car stereo system.  
Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote lead of the other equipment so that it  
can be controlled through this unit.  
Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the amplifier. Leave the speaker  
leads of this unit unused.  
Anda dapat menyambungkan penguat untuk meningkatkan sistem stereo mobil anda.  
• Sambungkan ujung jauh (biru dengan strip putih) ke ujung jauh dari peralatan lain sehingga dapat  
dikontrol melalui alat penerima ini.  
• Putuskan sambungan speaker-speaker dari alat penerima ini, sambungkan ini ke penguat.  
Biarkan ujung speaker dari alat penerima ini tidak digunakan.  
Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)  
Konektor Y (tidak disediakan untuk alat penerima ini)  
Set “L/O MODE” to “REAR” (See page 15 of the  
INSTRUCTIONS.)  
Setel “L/O MODE ” ke “REAR” (Lihat halaman 15 dari  
BUKU PETUNJUK.)  
Remote lead (blue with white stripe)  
Ujung jauh (biru dengan strip putih)  
Rear speakers  
Speaker-speaker  
JVC Amplifier  
Penguat JVC  
To the remote lead of other equipment or automatic antenna if any  
Ke ujung jauh dari peralatan lain atau antena otomatis jika ada  
belakang  
Set “L/O MODE” to “WOOFER” (See page 15 of the  
INSTRUCTIONS.)  
Setel “L/O MODE ” ke “WOOFER” (Lihat halaman 15 dari  
BUKU PETUNJUK.)  
Front speakers  
Speaker-speaker depan  
or  
atau  
Subwoofer  
Subwoofer  
JVC Amplifier  
Penguat JVC  
Connecting an Apple iPod Menghubungkan Apple iPod  
C
/
Apple iPod (separately purchased)  
Apple iPod (dibeli terpisah)  
Cable tie  
You can connect an iPod to this unit using the supplied connection cable for iPod.  
1 Insert the supplied cable tie across the loop.  
2 Press in the head of the connection cable for iPod until you hear a clicking sound.  
Ikat kabel  
3 Fasten the connection cable using the cable tie to firmly hold the connection cable in place.  
Anda dapat menghubungkan iPod dengan menggunakan kabel koneksi iPod yang disediakan.  
1 Masukkan kabel yang disediakan, ikat melintasi lingkaran.  
2 Tekan pada bagian kepala kabel sambungan untuk iPod sampai Anda mendengar bunyi klik.  
3 Kencangkan kabel sambungan dengan menggunakan ikat kabel agar kabel sambungan terpaku di  
dalam tempatnya.  
Connection cable for iPod (supplied)  
Kabel koneksi untuk iPod (disediakan)  
Loop  
Loop  
iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.  
iPod adalah merek dagang dari Apple Computer, Inc., terdaftar di Amerika Serikat dan di negara-negara lain.  
3
3
*
Pasangkan dengan kuat kabel tanah ke bodi besi atau ke casis dari mobil—pada tempat yang tidak dilapisi cat  
(jika dilapisi cat, hilangkan cat sebelum memasang kabel). Kegagalan melakukan ini mungkin menyebabkan  
kerusakan pada alat penerima tersebut.  
*
Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of the car—to the place uncoated with paint  
(if coated with paint, remove the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause damage to the  
unit.  
Remote lead  
4
5
4
5
*
*
Ujung jauh  
*
*
Kabel sinyal (tidak disediakan untuk alat penerima ini)  
Signal cord (not supplied for this unit).  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
PEMECAHAN MASALAH  
The fuse blows.  
• Sekring meledak.  
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?  
* Apakah ujung-ujung merah dan hitam tersambung dengan benar?  
Power cannot be turned on.  
• Power tidak dapat dihidupkan.  
* Is the yellow lead connected?  
* Apakah ujung kuning sudah tersambung?  
No sound from the speakers.  
• Tidak ada suara dari speaker.  
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?  
* Apakah ujung keluaran speaker terhubung pendek?  
Sound is distorted.  
• Suara terdistorsi.  
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?  
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?  
* Apakah ujung keluaran speaker sudah ditanahkan?  
* Apakah terminal-terminal “–” dari speaker-speaker L dan R sudah ditanahkan secara umum?  
Noise interfere with sounds.  
• Berisik yang mengganggu suara-suara.  
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and thicker cords?  
* Apakah terminal tanahan belakang tersambung ke casis mobil menggunakan kabel-kabel terpendek dan  
tertebal?  
This unit becomes hot.  
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?  
• Alat penerima menjadi panas.  
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?  
* Apakah ujung keluaran speaker sudah ditanahkan?  
* Apakah terminal-terminal “–” dari speaker-speaker L dan R sudah ditanahkan secara umum?  
This unit does not work at all.  
* Have you reset your unit?  
• Alat penerima ini tidak bekerja secara keseluruhan.  
* Apakah anda sudah reset (memasang kembali) alat penerima anda?  
4
CD RECEIVER  
KD-PDR35  
KD-PDR35  
For canceling the display demonstration, see page 6.  
For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.  
INSTRUCTIONS  
GET0468-005A  
[UT]  
Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.  
Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to obtain the best  
possible performance from the unit.  
IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS  
1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT  
2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to  
qualified service personnel.  
3. CAUTION: Visible and/or invisible class 1M laser radiation when open. Do not view directly with optical  
instruments.  
4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.  
How to reset your unit  
[European Union only]  
Warning:  
Your preset adjustments will also be erased.  
If you need to operate the unit while driving, be  
sure to look ahead carefully or you may be involved  
in a traffic accident.  
How to forcibly eject a disc  
Caution on volume setting:  
Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.  
If this does not work, reset your unit.  
Discs produce very little noise compared with other  
sources. Lower the volume before playing a disc  
to avoid damaging the speakers by the sudden  
increase of the output level.  
2
How to use the M MODE button  
CONTENTS  
If you press M MODE, the unit goes into functions mode,  
then the number buttons and 5/buttons work as  
different function buttons.  
Control panel ..................................  
Remote controller — RM-RK50...........  
4
5
Ex.: When number button 2 works as MO (monaural)  
button.  
Getting started................................  
Basic operations...................................................  
6
6
Radio operations .............................  
7
Disc operations................................  
Playing a disc in the unit .....................................  
8
8
To use these buttons for their original functions  
again after pressing M MODE, wait for 5 seconds  
without pressing any of these buttons until the  
functions mode is cleared or press M MODE again.  
iPod operations ............................... 11  
Sound adjustments.......................... 13  
General settings — PSM .................. 14  
External component operations ....... 16  
Maintenance ................................... 16  
More about this unit ........................ 17  
Troubleshooting.............................. 21  
Specifications.................................. 23  
Detaching the control panel  
For safety...  
Attaching the control panel  
• Do not raise the volume level too much, as this will  
block outside sounds, making driving dangerous.  
• Stop the car before performing any complicated  
operations.  
Temperature inside the car...  
If you have parked the car for a long time in hot or cold  
weather, wait until the temperature in the car becomes  
normal before operating the unit.  
3
Control panel  
Parts identification  
Display window  
1
Control dial  
o
;
a
s
RND (random) button  
M MODE button  
(control panel release) button  
Disc information indicators—  
TAG (Tag information), (track/file), (folder)  
DISC indicator  
Playback mode / item indicators— RND (random),  
(disc), (folder), RPT (repeat)  
Tuner reception indicators—MO (monaural),  
ST (stereo)  
2 0 (eject) button  
3
4
5
Loading slot  
EQ (equalizer) button  
DISP (display) button  
6 4 /¢ buttons  
d
f
7
8
9
Display window  
(standby/on attenuator) button  
AUX (auxiliary) input jack  
g
p 5 (up) / (down) buttons  
q
w
e
r
SEL (select) button  
BAND button  
SRC (source) button  
Remote sensor  
DO NOT expose the remote sensor to strong light  
(direct sunlight or artificial lighting).  
MO (monaural) button  
SSM (Strong-station Sequential Memory) button  
Number buttons  
h
j
k
l
/
z
S.BASS (super bass) indicator  
EQ (equalizer) indicator  
Tr (track) indicator  
Source display / Time countdown indicator  
Main display  
Sound mode (iEQ: intelligent equalizer)  
indicators—JAZZ, ROCK, HIP HOP, CLASSIC, POPS,  
USER  
t
y
u
i
RPT (repeat) button  
4
Main elements and features  
Remote controller —  
RM-RK50  
Installing the lithium coin battery  
(CR2025)  
CR2025  
Aim the remote controller directly at the remote  
sensor on the unit. Make sure there is no obstacle  
in between.  
1
(standby/on/attenuator) button  
• Turns the power on if pressed briefly or  
attenuates the sound when the power is on.  
• Turns the power off if pressed and held.  
Warning:  
2 5 U (up) / D (down) buttons  
• Changes the FM/AM bands with 5 U.  
• Changes the preset stations with D .  
• Changes the folder of the MP3/WMA discs.  
• While listening to an Apple iPod.  
– Pauses or resumes playback with D .  
– Enters the main menu with 5 U.  
(Now 5 U/D /2 R/F 3 work as the menu  
selecting buttons.)*  
• Do not install any battery other than CR2025 or its  
equivalent; otherwise, it may explode.  
• Do not leave the remote controller in a place  
(such as dashboards) exposed to direct sunlight  
for a long time; otherwise, it may explode.  
• Store the battery in a place where children cannot  
reach to avoid risk of accident.  
• To prevent the battery from over-heating,  
cracking, or starting a fire:  
– Do not recharge, short, disassemble, heat the  
battery, or dispose of it in a fire.  
3
VOL – / VOL + buttons  
• Adjusts the volume level.  
SOUND button  
4
• Selects the sound mode (iEQ: intelligent  
equalizer).  
– Do not leave the battery with other metallic  
materials.  
– Do not poke the battery with tweezers or  
similar tools.  
5
SOURCE button  
• Selects the source.  
– Wrap the battery with tape and insulate when  
throwing away or saving it.  
* 5 U : Returns to the previous menu.  
D : Confirms the selection.  
Continued on the next page  
5
6 2 R (reverse) / F (forward) 3 buttons  
• Searches for stations if pressed briefly.  
• Fast-forwards or reverses the track if pressed and  
held.  
@ Adjust the sound as you want. (See  
page 13.)  
• Changes the tracks if pressed briefly.  
• While listening to an iPod (in menu selecting  
mode):  
– Selects an item if pressed briefly. (Then, press  
D to confirm the selection.)  
To drop the volume in a  
moment (ATT)  
To restore the sound, press  
the button again.  
To turn off the power  
– Skips 10 items at a time if pressed and held.  
Getting started  
Basic settings  
Basic operations  
~ Turn on the power.  
• See also “General settings — PSM” on pages 14 and  
15.  
1
2
Ÿ
1 Canceling the display demonstrations  
Select “DEMO,” then “DEMO OFF.”  
2 Setting the clock  
Select “CLOCK H” (hour), then adjust the hour.  
Select “CLOCK M” (minute), then adjust the  
minute.  
1
*
You cannot select “CD” as the playback source  
if there is no disc in the unit.  
“NO IPOD” appears if iPod is not connected.  
2
*
3
Finish the procedure.  
! For FM/AM tuner  
To check the current clock time while the  
power is turned off  
Adjust the volume.  
Clock time is shown on the display for  
about 5 seconds. See also page 14.  
VOL 20  
Volume level appears.  
6
When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to  
receive  
Radio operations  
~
Lights up when monaural mode is activated.  
Ÿ
MONO  
Lights up when receiving an FM stereo  
broadcast with sufficient signal strength.  
Reception improves, but stereo effect will be lost.  
To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same  
procedure. “MONO OFF” appears and the MO indicator  
goes off.  
88.3  
! Start searching for a station.  
Storing stations in memory  
You can preset six stations for each band.  
When a station is received, searching stops.  
To stop searching, press the same button  
again.  
FM station automatic presetting—  
SSM (Strong-station Sequential  
Memory)  
1
Select the FM band (FM1 – FM3) you want to  
store into.  
To tune in to a station manually  
In step ! above...  
1
2
3
M
2
Select a desired station frequency.  
SSM  
“SSM” flashes, then disappears when automatic  
presetting is over.  
Local FM stations with the strongest signals are  
searched and stored automatically in the FM band.  
7
Manual presetting  
Ex.: Storing FM station of 92.5 MHz into preset  
number 4 of the FM1 band.  
Disc operations  
Playing a disc in the unit  
All tracks will be played repeatedly until you change the  
source or eject the disc.  
1
2
FM I 92.5  
3
P4  
92.5  
Preset number flashes for a while.  
To stop play and eject the disc  
• Press SRC to listen to another  
playback source.  
Listening to a preset station  
1
2
To fast-forward or reverse the track  
To go to the next or previous tracks  
Select the preset station (1 – 6) you want.  
or  
To go to the next or previous folders (only for  
MP3 or WMA discs)  
To check other information while listening  
to the radio  
Clock Ô Frequency  
8
To locate a particular track (for CD) or folder  
(for MP3 or WMA discs) directly  
Other main functions  
To select a number from 01 – 06:  
Skipping tracks quickly during play  
• For MP3 or WMA discs, you can skip tracks within the  
same folder.  
To select a number from 07 – 12:  
Ex.: To select track 32 while playing a track whose  
number is a single digit (1 to 9)  
1
2
• To use direct folder access on MP3/WMA discs, it  
is required that folders are assigned with 2-digit  
numbers at the beginning of their folder names—  
01, 02, 03, and so on.  
Each time you press the button, you can skip 10  
tracks.  
To select a particular track in a folder  
(for MP3 or WMA discs):  
• After the last track, the first track will be selected  
and vice versa.  
3
Prohibiting disc ejection  
You can lock a disc in the loading slot.  
NO EJECT  
To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same  
procedure.  
9
Changing the display information  
While playing an audio CD or a CD Text  
Selecting the playback modes  
You can use only one of the following playback modes  
at a time.  
1
2
Select your desired playback mode.  
Repeat play  
7
While playing an MP3 or a WMA track  
• When “TAG DISP” is set to “TAG ON”  
(see page 15)  
Mode  
Plays repeatedly  
TRK RPT  
: The current track.  
FLDR RPT* : All tracks of the current folder.  
RPT OFF  
: Cancels.  
7
Random play  
Mode  
Plays at random  
• When “TAG DISP” is set to “TAG OFF”  
FLDR RND* : All tracks of the current folder,  
then tracks of the next folder  
and so on.  
DISC RND  
: All tracks of the current disc.  
RND OFF  
: Cancels.  
: Clock with the current track number  
: Elapsed playing time with the current  
track number  
: Corresponding indicator lights up on  
the display  
* Only while playing an MP3 or a WMA disc.  
: Corresponding indicator lights up  
on the display  
1
2
*
*
If the current disc is an audio CD, “NO NAME” appears.  
If an MP3/WMA file does not have Tag information,  
folder name and file name appear. In this case, the  
TAG indicator will not light up.  
10  
Caution:  
iPod operations  
You can play songs from an Apple iPod through this unit  
by connecting it with the supplied connection cable for  
iPod.  
• Avoid using the iPod if it might hinder your safety  
driving.  
• Make sure all important data has been backed up  
to avoid losing the data.  
• Disconnecting the iPod will stop playback. Press SRC  
to listen to another playback source.  
To pause playback  
• For connection, see Installation/Connection Manual  
(separate volume).  
To resume playback, press the  
button again.  
• For details, refer also to the manual supplied with  
your iPod.  
~ Connect an iPod.  
To fast-forward or reverse the track  
To go to the next or previous tracks  
Connection cable for iPod  
If an iPod has been connected...  
Playback starts automatically from where it has  
been paused previously.  
Ÿ Adjust the volume.  
! Adjust the sound as you want. (See  
page 13.)  
11  
Selecting a track from the menu  
Selecting the playback modes  
1
2
Enter the main menu.  
1
2
Select your desired playback mode.  
7
Repeat play  
Now the 5//4 /¢ buttons work as  
the menu selecting buttons*.  
Mode  
Playback functions (as on iPod)  
Select the desired menu.  
ONE RPT : Same as “Repeat One.”  
ALL RPT  
RPT OFF  
: Same as “Repeat All.”  
: Cancels.  
7
Random play  
PLAYLIST Ô ARTISTS Ô ALBUMS Ô  
SONGS Ô GENRES Ô COMPOSER Ô  
(back to the beginning)  
Mode  
Playback functions (as on iPod)  
ALBM RND *: Same as “Shuffle Albums.”  
SONG RND : Same as “Shuffle Songs.”  
RND OFF : Cancels.  
3
Confirm the selection.  
To move back to the previous  
* Functions only if you select “ALL” in “ALBUMS” of  
menu, press 5.  
the main “MENU.”  
: Corresponding indicator lights up  
on the display  
• If a track is selected, playback starts  
automatically.  
• If the selected item has another layer, you will  
enter the layer. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until the  
desired track is played (see page 20).  
• Holding 4 /¢ can skip 10 items at  
a time.  
To check other information while listening  
to an iPod  
* The menu selecting mode will be canceled:  
– If no operations are done for about 5 seconds.  
– When you confirm the selection of a track.  
12  
Indication, [Range]  
BAS*2 (bass), [–06 to +06]  
Sound adjustments  
Adjust the bass.  
You can select a preset sound mode suitable to the  
music genre (iEQ: intelligent equalizer).  
MID*2 (mid-range), [–06 to +06]  
Adjust the mid-range frequencies sound level.  
TRE*2 (treble), [–06 to +06]  
Adjust the treble.  
FAD*3 (fader), [R06 to F06]  
Adjust the front and rear speaker balance.  
Preset values  
BAS*1 MID*2 TRE*3 S.BS*4  
BAL*4 (balance), [L06 to R06]  
Adjust the left and right speaker balance.  
S.BS*2 (super bass), [S.BS ON or S.BS OFF],  
[01 to 05, initial: 03]*5  
Maintain the richness and fullness of the bass sound  
regardless of how low you set the volume.  
Indication (For)  
USER  
(Flat sound)  
00  
00  
00  
00  
00 OFF  
+02 ON  
+03 OFF  
ROCK  
(Rock or disco music)  
+03  
+01  
SUB.W*1 (subwoofer), [00 to 08, initial: 04]  
Adjust the subwoofer output level.  
CLASSIC  
(Classical music)  
VOL (volume), [00 to 30 or 50*6]  
Adjust the volume.  
POPS  
(Light music)  
+02 +01 +02 OFF  
+04 –02 +01 ON  
1
*
Displayed only when “L/O MODE” is set to “WOOFER”  
(see page 15).  
HIP HOP  
(Funk or rap music)  
2
*
When you adjust the bass, mid-range, treble, or super  
bass, the adjustment you have made is stored for the  
currently selected sound mode (iEQ) including “USER.”  
If you are using a two-speaker system, set the fader  
level to “00.”  
This adjustment will not affect the subwoofer output.  
Range adjustment for super bass is adjustable only  
when it is set to “S.BS ON.“  
JAZZ  
(Jazz music)  
+03  
00  
+03 OFF  
3
*
*1 : Bass; *2 : Mid-range; *3 : Treble; *4 : Super bass  
4
5
*
*
Adjusting the sound  
You can adjust the sound characteristics to your  
preference.  
6
*
Depending on the amplifier gain control setting. (See  
page 15 for details.)  
1
2
13  
General settings — PSM  
You can change PSM (Preferred Setting Mode) items  
listed in the table that follows.  
3
Adjust the PSM item selected.  
1
4
5
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust other PSM  
items if necessary.  
2
Select a PSM item.  
Finish the procedure.  
Indications  
Item  
: Initial)  
Setting, [reference page]  
(
DEMO  
• DEMO ON  
:
Display demonstration will be activated automatically if no operation  
Display  
demonstration  
is done for about 20 seconds, [6].  
Cancels.  
• DEMO OFF  
• ON  
:
:
CLK DISP*1  
Clock display  
Clock time is shown on the display at all times when the power is  
turned off.  
• OFF  
:
Cancels; pressing DISP will show the clock time for about 5 seconds  
when the power is turned off, [6].  
CLOCK H  
Hour adjustment  
1 – 12  
00 – 59  
[Initial: 1 (1:00)], [6].  
[Initial: 00 (1:00)], [6].  
CLOCK M  
Minute adjustment  
DIMMER  
Dimmer  
• ON  
• OFF  
:
:
Dims the display illumination.  
Cancels.  
1
*
If the power supply is not interrupted by turning off the ignition key of your car, it is recommended to select “OFF” to  
save the car’s battery.  
14  
Indications  
Item  
Setting, [reference page]  
(
: Initial)  
SCROLL*2  
Scroll  
• ONCE  
• AUTO  
• OFF  
:
:
:
Scrolls the track information once.  
Repeats scrolling (at 5-second intervals).  
Cancels.  
• Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display  
regardless of the setting.  
L/O MODE  
Line output mode  
• REAR  
:
:
Select if the REAR LINE OUT terminals are used for connecting the  
speakers (through an external amplifier).  
Select if the REAR LINE OUT terminals are used for connecting a  
subwoofer (through an external amplifier).  
• WOOFER  
WOOFER*3  
Subwoofer cutoff  
frequency  
• LOW  
• MID  
• HIGH  
:
:
:
Frequencies lower than 90 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.  
Frequencies lower than 135 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.  
Frequencies lower than 180 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.  
AUX ADJ  
A.ADJ 00  
:
Adjust the auxiliary input level to avoid the sudden increase of the  
output level when changing the source from external component  
connected to the AUX input jack on the control panel.  
Auxiliary input level — A.ADJ 05  
adjustment  
TAG DISP  
Tag display  
• TAG ON  
• TAG OFF  
:
:
Shows the Tag information while playing MP3/WMA tracks, [10].  
Cancels.  
AMP GAIN  
Amplifier gain  
control  
• LOW PWR  
:
VOL 00 – VOL 30. (Select this if the maximum power of the speaker is  
less than 50 W to prevent damaging the speaker.)  
VOL 00 – VOL 50.  
• HIGH PWR  
• AUTO  
:
:
IF BAND  
Intermediate  
frequency band  
Increases the tuner selectivity to reduce interference noises between  
close stations. (Stereo effect may be lost.)  
Subject to interference noises from adjacent stations, but sound  
quality will not be degraded and the stereo effect will remain.  
• WIDE  
:
2
*
*
Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.  
Displayed only when “L/O MODE” is set to “WOOFER.”  
3
15  
Maintenance  
External component  
operations  
You can connect an external component to the AUX  
(auxiliary) input jack on the control panel.  
How to clean the connectors  
Frequent detachment will deteriorate the connectors.  
To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe the  
connectors with a cotton swab or cloth moistened with  
alcohol, being careful not to damage the connectors.  
Connector  
Moisture condensation  
Moisture may condense on the lens inside the unit in  
the following cases:  
• After starting the heater in the car.  
~
• If it becomes very humid inside the car.  
Should this occur, the unit may malfunction. In this  
case, eject the disc and leave the unit turned on for a  
few hours until the moisture evaporates.  
Ÿ Turn on the connected component and  
start playing the source.  
! Adjust the volume.  
How to handle discs  
When removing a disc from its  
case, press down the center holder  
of the case and lift the disc out,  
holding it by the edges.  
Center holder  
• Always hold the disc by the edges. Do not touch its  
recording surface.  
When storing a disc into its case, gently insert the  
disc around the center holder (with the printed surface  
facing up).  
Adjust the sound as you want. (See  
page 13.)  
To check other information while listening  
to an external component  
• Make sure to store discs into the cases after use.  
Clock Ô AUX IN  
16  
To keep discs clean  
More about this unit  
Basic operations  
A dirty disc may not play correctly.  
If a disc does become dirty, wipe it with  
a soft cloth in a straight line from center  
to edge.  
Turning on the power  
• Do not use any solvent (for example, conventional  
record cleaner, spray, thinner, benzine, etc.) to clean  
discs.  
• By pressing SRC on the unit, you can also turn on the  
power. If the source is ready, playback also starts.  
Turning off the power  
• If you turn off the power while listening to a track,  
playback starts from where playback it has been  
stopped previously, next time you turn on the power.  
To play new discs  
New discs may have some rough spots  
around the inner and outer edges. If  
such a disc is used, this unit may reject  
the disc.  
To remove these rough spots, rub the edges with a  
pencil or ball-point pen, etc.  
General  
• If you change the source while listening to a disc or  
an iPod, playback stops.  
Next time you select “CD” or “IPOD” as the playback  
source, playback starts from where it has been  
stopped/paused previously.  
• After ejecting a disc or disconnecting an iPod,  
“NO DISC” or “NO IPOD” appears and you cannot  
operate some of the buttons. Insert another disc,  
reconnect an iPod, or press SRC to select another  
playback source.  
Do not use the following discs:  
Warped disc  
Sticker  
Sticker residue  
Tuner operations  
Storing stations in memory  
Stick-on label  
• During SSM search...  
– All previously stored stations are erased and  
stations are stored newly.  
Unusual shape  
– Received stations are preset in No. 1 (lowest  
frequency) to No. 6 (highest frequency).  
– When SSM is over, the station stored in No. 1 will  
be automatically tuned in.  
Single CD (8 cm disc)  
• When storing a station manually, the previously  
preset station is erased when a new station is stored  
in the same preset number.  
Continued on the next page  
17  
• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:  
– Discs with stickers, labels, or a protective seal stuck  
to the surface.  
– Discs on which labels can be directly printed by an  
ink jet printer.  
Using these discs under high temperatures or high  
humidities may cause malfunctions or damage to the  
unit.  
Disc operations  
Caution for DualDisc playback  
• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply  
with the “Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard.  
Therefore, the use of Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on  
this product may not be recommended.  
General  
• This unit has been designed to reproduce CDs/CD  
Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/CD-RWs (Rewritable)  
in audio CD (CD-DA), MP3 and WMA formats.  
• When a disc is inserted upside down, “PLEASE” and  
“EJECT” appear alternately on the display. Press 0 to  
eject the disc.  
• MP3 and WMA “tracks” (words “file” and “track” are  
used interchangeably) are recorded in “folders.”  
• While fast-forwarding or reversing on an MP3 or  
WMA disc, you can only hear intermittent sounds.  
Playing an MP3/WMA disc  
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files with the  
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> (regardless of  
the letter case—upper/lower).  
• This unit can show the names of albums, artists  
(performer), and Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or  
2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.  
• This unit can display only one-byte characters. No  
other characters can be correctly displayed.  
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the  
conditions below:  
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW  
– Bit rate: 8 kbps — 320 kbps  
– Sampling frequency:  
• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.  
• This unit can play back only files of the same type  
which are first detected if a disc includes both audio  
CD (CD-DA) files and MP3/WMA files.  
• This unit can play back multi-session discs; however,  
unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.  
• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not play back on this  
unit because of their disc characteristics, or for the  
following reasons:  
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)  
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)  
– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2, Romeo,  
Joliet, Windows long file name  
• The maximum number of characters for file/folder  
names vary among the disc format used (includes 4  
extension characters—<.mp3> or <.wma>).  
– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters  
– ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters  
– Romeo: up to 128 characters  
– Discs are dirty or scratched.  
– Moisture condensation occurs on the lens inside  
the unit.  
– Joliet: up to 64 characters  
– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.  
– CD-R/CD-RW on which the files are written with  
“Packet Write” method.  
– Windows long file name: up to 128 characters  
• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files, of 200  
folders, and of 8 hierarchies.  
– There are improper recording conditions (missing  
data, etc.) or media conditions (stained, scratched,  
warped, etc.).  
CD-RWs may require a longer readout time since the  
reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than that of regular CDs.  
• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR (variable  
bit rate).  
Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in elapsed  
time display, and do not show the actual elapsed  
time. Especially, after performing the search function,  
this difference becomes noticeable.  
18  
• This unit cannot play back the following files:  
– MP3 files encoded with MP3i and MP3 PRO format.  
– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.  
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.  
– WMA files encoded with lossless, professional, and  
voice format.  
• When you turn on this unit, the iPod is charged  
through this unit.  
• While the iPod is connected, all operations from the  
iPod are disabled. Perform all operations from this  
unit.  
• While connecting an iPod with Video:  
– No video shows on the iPod’s display or the  
external monitor (only the audio part is available).  
– It is not possible to browse video files on the  
“Video“ menu. (If you connect the iPod during  
playback or pausing of a video file, resuming  
playback will not work.)  
– WMA files which are not based upon Windows  
Media Audio.  
®
– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.  
– Files which have the data such as AIFF, ATRAC3, etc.  
• The search function works but search speed is not  
constant.  
• iPod shuffle is not controllable.  
• You can control the iPod from this unit when “JVC” or  
Ejecting a disc  
” appears on the iPod display.  
• If the ejected disc is not removed within 15 seconds,  
the disc is automatically inserted again into the  
loading slot to protect it from dust. Playback starts  
automatically.  
• The songs order displayed on the selecting menu of  
this unit may differ from the iPod.  
• If playback is stopped, select a track from the  
selecting menu or press .  
• The text information may not be displayed correctly.  
– Some characters such as accented letters cannot be  
shown correctly on the display.  
– Depends on the condition of communication  
between the iPod and the unit.  
• If the text information includes more than 8  
characters, it scrolls on the display.  
This unit can display up to 40 characters.  
iPod operations  
Controllable iPod  
Software version  
iPod with dock connector  
(3rd Generation)  
2.3 or later  
iPod with Click Wheel  
(4th Generation)  
3.1 or later  
iPod mini  
iPod photo  
iPod nano  
1.4 or later  
1.2 or later  
1.0 or later  
1.0 or later  
General settings—PSM  
• If you change the “AMP GAIN” setting from  
“HIGH PWR” to “LOW PWR” while the volume level  
is set higher than “VOL 30,” the unit automatically  
changes the volume level to “VOL 30.”  
iPod with Video  
(5th Generation)  
• If your iPod software version is older than those  
mentioned above, you may not be able to control the  
iPod properly. Update your iPod to the latest software  
version before using it with this unit.  
– You can check the software version of your iPod  
from “About” in the “Setting” menu of the iPod.  
– For details about updating your iPod, visit  
<http://www.apple.com>.  
19  
Hierarchical structure of file searching when an iPod is connected  
20  
Troubleshooting  
What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service center.  
Symptoms  
Remedies/Causes  
• Sound cannot be heard from the speakers.  
• Adjust the volume to the optimum level.  
• Check the cords and connections.  
• The unit does not work at all.  
Reset the unit (see page 2).  
Store stations manually.  
• SSM automatic presetting does not work.  
• Static noise while listening to the radio.  
• Disc cannot be played back.  
Connect the antenna firmly.  
Insert the disc correctly.  
• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played back.  
• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.  
• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot be skipped. • Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component which  
you used for recording.  
• Disc can neither be played back nor ejected. • Unlock the disc (see page 9).  
• Eject the disc forcibly (see page 2).  
• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted.  
• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.  
• Change the disc.  
• Check the cords and connections.  
• “NO DISC” appears on the display.  
• Disc cannot be played back.  
Insert a playable disc into the loading slot.  
• Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in the  
format compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1, Level 2,  
Romeo, or Joliet.  
• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to the  
file names.  
• Noise is generated.  
Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not add the  
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to non-MP3 or  
WMA tracks.)  
• A longer readout time is required (“CHECK”  
keeps flashing on the display).  
Do not use too many hierarchies and folders.  
Continued on the next page  
21  
Symptoms  
Remedies/Causes  
• Tracks do not play back in the order you have Playback order is determined when the files are recorded.  
intended them to play.  
Elapsed  
playing  
time  
is  
not  
correct.This  
the tracks are recorded on the disc.  
• “PLEASE” and “EJECT“ appear alternately on Insert a disc that contains MP3/WMA tracks.  
the display.  
• Correct characters are not displayed (e.g.  
album name).  
This unit can only display letters (upper case), numbers,  
and a limited number of symbols.  
The iPod does not turn on or does not work.•  
• Update the firmware version.  
Check the connectin  
Charge the battery.  
The  
sound  
is  
e and its connecthtieon.  
disto  
display.•  
“NO  
IPOD”  
Ch  
a
e
p
c
p
k
e
t
a
h
r
e
s
connecting cab  
oln  
• Charge the battery  
Playback  
stops.The  
off the unit’s power and turn it on again.  
h
• No sound can be heard when connecting an • Disconnect the headphones from the iPod nano.  
iPod nano.  
• Update the firmware version of the iPod nano.  
• “NO FILES” appears on the display.  
No tracks are stored. Import tracks to the iPod.  
“RESET 1”  
“RESET 7” appears on the display.Reconnect the iPod.  
• “RESET 8” appears on the display.  
Check the connecting cable and its connection  
Reset the iPod.  
• The iPod’s controls do not work after  
disconnecting from this unit.  
• Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the  
United States and/or other countries.  
• iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.  
22  
Specifications  
AUDIO AMPLIFIER SECTION  
CD PLAYER SECTION  
Maximum Power Output:  
Type:  
Compact disc player  
Front/Rear:  
Continuous Power Output (RMS):  
50 W per channel  
Signal Detection  
System:  
Non-contact optical pickup  
(semiconductor laser)  
Front/Rear:  
19 W per channel into 4 Ω,  
Number of Channels: 2 channels (stereo)  
Frequency Response: 5 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
40 Hz to 20 000 Hz at no more  
than 0.8% total harmonic  
distortion.  
Dynamic Range:  
96 dB  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio 98 dB  
Load Impedance:  
Tone Control Range:  
Bass:  
Mid-range:  
Treble:  
4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)  
Wow and Flutter:  
Less than measurable limit  
MP3 Decoding Format: (MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3)  
12 dB at 60 Hz  
12 dB at 1 kHz  
12 dB at 7.5 kHz  
Max. Bit Rate:  
320 kbps  
WMA (Windows Media® Audio) Decoding Format:  
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 70 dB  
Max. Bit Rate:  
192 kbps  
Line-Out Level/  
Impedance:  
Subwoofer-Out  
Level/Impedance:  
Output Impedance: 1 kΩ  
Other Terminal:  
2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)  
GENERAL  
Power Requirement:  
2.5 V /20 kΩ load (full scale)  
Operating Voltage: DC 14.4 V  
(11 V to 16 V allowance)  
Negative ground  
Grounding System:  
AUX (auxiliary) input jack,  
iPod jack  
Allowable Operating 0°C to +40°C  
Temperature:  
Dimensions (W × H × D): (approx.)  
TUNER SECTION  
Frequency Range:  
FM:  
Installation Size:  
Panel Size:  
182 mm × 52 mm × 150 mm  
187 mm × 58 mm × 13 mm  
87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHZ  
531 kHz to 1 602 kHz  
Mass:  
1.3 kg (excluding accessories)  
AM:  
FM Tuner  
Usable Sensitivity:  
50 dB Quieting  
Sensitivity:  
Design and specifications are subject to change without  
notice.  
11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)  
16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)  
Alternate Channel  
65 dB  
Selectivity (400 kHz):  
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 15 000 Hz  
Stereo Separation:  
30 dB  
AM Tuner  
Sensitivity:  
Selectivity:  
20 μV  
35 dB  
23  
Having TROUBLE with operation?  
Please reset your unit  
Refer to page of How to reset your unit  
EN, CT  
© 2006 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
1206DTSMDTJEIN  
KD-PDR35  
Installation/Connection Manual  
安裝/連接手冊  
1206DTSMDTJEIN  
EN, CT  
© 2006 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
GET0468-010A  
[UT]  
中文  
ENGLISH  
本機僅可使用直流 12 V、負極接地的電源系統。如果您的車輛沒有這一電源  
壓變換器,可以在 JVC 汽車音響分銷商處買到。  
系統,需要 一個電  
This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical systems. If your vehicle does  
not have this system, a voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC car audio dealers.  
警告  
WARNINGS  
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery’s negative terminal and make all  
electrical connections before installing the unit.  
為防止短路,建議在安裝本機之前  
安裝完畢後務必將本機的地線重新接至車身。  
,斷開電池的負極,並把所有電路都連接好。  
Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after installation.  
注意:  
Notes:  
把保險 絲更換為額定負荷值的保險 絲。如果保險 絲經常燒壞,請向  
和前 揚聲器的最大輸入功率應大於 50 W,其阻抗為 4 Ω - 8 Ω。如果最大功率小於 50 W,  
請調校“AMP GAIN”設定值,以防止揚聲器損壞。(參閱使用說明的第 15 頁。)  
為防止電短路,請用絕緣帶包住未使用電線的端子。  
JVC 汽車音響分銷商詢問。  
Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently, consult your JVC car audio  
dealer.  
It is recommended to connect to the speakers with maximum power of more than 50 W (both at  
the rear and at the front, with an impedance of 4 to 8 ). If the maximum power is less than  
50 W, change “AMP GAIN” setting to prevent the speakers from being damaged (see page 15 of the  
INSTRUCTIONS).  
本機使用後,散熱片會很熱。因此,在移出本機時,小心不要 觸摸散熱片。  
To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.  
The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it when removing this unit.  
Heat sink  
散熱片  
PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections:  
DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the car battery; otherwise, the unit  
電源和揚聲器接線注意事項:  
切勿把揚聲器導線接頭接至電池,否則本機將會嚴重損壞。  
will be seriously damaged.  
BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the speakers, check the speaker wiring in  
在把揚聲器導線接頭接至揚聲器之前  
,檢查您汽車上的揚聲器線路。  
your car.  
Parts list for installation and connection  
The following parts are provided for this unit. If any item is missing, consult your JVC car audio dealer  
immediately.  
用於安裝和連接的零件清單  
下列零件隨本機提供。若有任何遺漏,立刻咨詢您的 JVC 汽車音響經銷商。  
A / B  
Hard case/Control panel  
C
D
E
Sleeve  
外套機殼  
Trim plate  
裝飾框  
Power cord  
電路連接用的配線束  
硬盒/控制面  
I
F
G
H
Lock nut (M5)  
鎖定螺母(M5)  
Connection cable for iPod  
iPod 連接電纜  
Cable tie  
電纜紮帶  
Washer (ø5)  
墊圈(ø5)  
J
K
L
M
N
Rubber cushion  
橡膠防震墊  
Handles  
板條型把手  
Remote controller  
Battery  
電池  
Mounting bolt (M5 × 20 mm)  
控器  
緊固  
螺栓(M5 × 20 mm)  
1
INSTALLATION (IN-DASH MOUNTING)  
安裝(裝設、固定在儀表板內)  
The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information  
regarding installation kits, consult your JVC car audio dealer or a company supplying kits.  
If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.  
的圖解表示了典型的安裝程序。如果您有問題,或需要 有關配套元件的資料,請向 JVC  
汽車音響分銷商或配套元件供應公司詢問。  
如果您不能確定如何正確地安裝本機,應請合格的技術人員來安裝。  
Do the required electrical connections.  
進行所需的電路連接。  
Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the  
sleeve firmly in place.  
弄彎機殼的突舌,把外套機殼牢固  
在儀  
表板內。  
Removing the unit  
Before removing the unit, release the rear section.  
拆卸本機  
在拆卸本機前  
,應將本機後部的定和連接部分鬆開。  
Insert the two handles, then pull them as  
illustrated so that the unit can be removed.  
按圖所示,將兩片板條型把手插入卡槽,然  
後輕穩地從兩側向  
外拉兩片把手,本機隨  
之拉出。  
When using the optional stay / 若選用支撐架  
When installing the unit without using the sleeve / 若不使用外套機殼安裝本機  
In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.  
Stay (option)  
支撐架(選用的)  
以豐田牌(TOYOTA)汽車為例:首先取出汽車收音機,然後將本機裝入其空出的位置  
Fire wall  
防火板  
Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
平頭螺絲釘(M5 × 8 mm*2  
Dashboard  
儀表板  
Bracket*2  
*2  
Screw (option)  
螺絲釘(選用的)  
Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2  
平頭螺絲釘(M5 × 8 mm*2  
Pocket  
空殼  
Bracket*2  
托座*2  
Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚.  
Note  
When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm -long screws. If longer screws  
are used, they could damage the unit.  
將本機安裝在少於 30˚ 的角度  
注意  
把本機安裝在托座上時,務必使用 8 mm 長的螺絲釘。如使用過長的螺絲釘,會損壞本機。  
1
2
1
*
*
When you stand the unit, be careful not to damage the fuse on the rear.  
Not supplied for this unit.  
*
*
您豎起本機時,小心不要 損壞底部的保險 絲。  
不隨本機提供。  
2
2
ENGLISH  
中文  
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS  
電路連接  
A
Typical connections / 典型的接線方法  
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious  
damage to this unit.  
接線前:仔細檢查汽車內的線路。不正確的接線會導致本機嚴重 損壞。  
線的引線和車身的連接器引線在顏色上可能有所不同。  
The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.  
1 依照下圖所示之次序連接電源  
線的顏色導線。  
1 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.  
2 Connect the antenna cord.  
3 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.  
2 將天線的電線連接起來。  
3 最後,把配線束的插頭插在本機上。  
Loop (see diagram  
線圈(參閱圖表  
)
Rear ground terminal  
本機後背接地端子  
15 A fuse  
15 A 保險  
Antenna terminal  
天線端子  
iPod jack  
(see diagram  
iPod 插座  
(參閱圖表  
)
Ignition switch  
點火開關  
Black  
黑色  
To metallic body or chassis of the car  
接至金屬體或汽車底盤  
Line out (see diagram  
輸出端子(參閱圖表  
)
Yellow *2  
黃色 *2  
To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery  
(bypassing the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)  
接至保險 絲單元內的附屬端子,保險 絲單元與車裝電池相連接  
(用於旁路點火開關)(恆定 12 V)  
Fuse block  
保險 絲單元  
Red  
紅色  
To an accessory terminal in the fuse block  
接至保險 絲單元內的附屬端子  
Blue  
藍色  
To the automatic antenna if any (250 mA max.)  
接至自動天線(若有裝設)(最大 250 mA)  
Blue with white stripe  
藍色帶有白色條紋  
To the remote lead of other equipment (200 mA max.)  
連接至其他裝上的遙控導線(最大 200 mA)  
White with black stripe  
白色帶有黑色條紋  
White  
白色  
Gray with black stripe  
灰色帶有黑色條紋  
Gray  
灰色  
Green with black stripe  
綠色帶有黑色條紋  
Green  
綠色  
Purple with black stripe  
紫色帶有黑色條紋  
Purple  
紫色  
Left speaker (front)  
Right speaker (front)  
Left speaker (rear)  
Right speaker (rear)  
左揚聲器(前  
右揚聲器(前  
左揚聲器(後置  
右揚聲器(後置  
1
2
1
2
*
*
Not supplied for this unit.  
*
*
不隨本機提供。  
本機未安裝時,進行工作狀況  
Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise power  
cannot be turned on.  
檢查之前  
,必須把這導線接上,否則  
不能開啟電源  
3
Connecting the external amplifier or subwoofer 連接至外部功率放大器或超重低音揚聲器  
B
/
You can connect amplifier to upgrade your car stereo system.  
Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote lead of the other equipment so that it  
can be controlled through this unit.  
Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the amplifier. Leave the speaker  
leads of this unit unused.  
您可以連接功率放大器以提昇尊  
將遙控導線(藍色帶有白色條紋)和其他裝上的遙控導線連接起來,以便可以通過本機進行  
遙控。  
車的音響系統。  
將揚聲器和本機斷開,再接上功率放大器。將本機的揚聲器接線放置不用。  
Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)  
Y-型連接導線(不隨本機提供)  
Set “L/O MODE” to “REAR” (See page 15 of the  
INSTRUCTIONS.)  
將“L/O MODE”設定為“REAR”(參閱使用  
說明書的第 15 頁。)  
Remote lead (blue with white stripe)  
遙控導線(藍色帶有白色條紋)  
Rear speakers  
揚聲器  
JVC Amplifier  
JVC 功率放大器  
To the remote lead of other equipment or automatic antenna if any  
後置  
連接至其他裝置  
上的遙控導線或自動天線(若有裝設)  
Set “L/O MODE” to “WOOFER” (See page 15 of the  
INSTRUCTIONS.)  
將“L/O MODE”設定為“WOOFER”(參閱使用  
說明書的第 15 頁。)  
Front speakers  
揚聲器  
or  
Subwoofer  
超重 低音揚聲器  
JVC Amplifier  
JVC 功率放大器  
Connecting an Apple iPod 連接 Apple iPod  
C
/
Apple iPod (separately purchased)  
You can connect an iPod to this unit using the supplied connection cable for iPod.  
1 Insert the supplied cable tie across the loop.  
Apple iPod(另購)  
Cable tie  
電纜紮帶  
2 Press in the head of the connection cable for iPod until you hear a clicking sound.  
3 Fasten the connection cable using the cable tie to firmly hold the connection cable in place.  
您可以使用附帶的 iPod 連接電纜將 iPod 和本機連接起來。  
1 將附帶的電纜紮帶系在線圈上。  
2 按住 iPod 連接電纜的頭部直至您聽到一聲卡嗒聲。  
3 使用電纜紮帶來固  
iPod 連接電纜的位置  
Connection cable for iPod (supplied)  
iPod 連接電纜(附帶)  
Loop  
線圈  
iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.  
iPod Apple Computer, Inc.(蘋果電腦公司)在美國及其他國家注冊的商標。  
3
3
*
將地線與金屬車體或者汽車底盤緊密連接,連接處應該沒有被油漆覆蓋(如果已塗上油漆,在連接電  
,將油漆刮去)。如果不這樣做,可能會損壞本機。  
*
Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of the car—to the place uncoated with paint  
(if coated with paint, remove the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause damage to the  
unit.  
Remote lead  
4
5
*
*
遙控導線  
4
5
*
*
信號電纜(不隨本機提供)。  
Signal cord (not supplied for this unit).  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
故障排除  
The fuse blows.  
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?  
保險絲燒斷。  
* 檢查紅色導線接頭和黑色導線接頭是否接觸正確?  
Power cannot be turned on.  
* Is the yellow lead connected?  
電源不能接通。  
* 檢查黃色導線接頭是否接上?  
No sound from the speakers.  
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?  
揚聲器沒有聲音。  
* 檢查揚聲器輸出導線接頭是否短路?  
Sound is distorted.  
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?  
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?  
聲音失真。  
* 檢查揚聲器輸出端子是否接地?  
* 檢查揚聲器的左(L)、右(R)端子的負極()是否共同接地?  
Noise interfere with sounds.  
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and thicker cords?  
噪音干擾音響。  
* 後接地端子與車身是否使用較短和較厚  
的電線連接?  
This unit becomes hot.  
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?  
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?  
本機發熱。  
* 檢查揚聲器輸出端子是否接地?  
* 檢查揚聲器的左(L)、右(R)端子的負極()是否共同接地?  
This unit does not work at all.  
* Have you reset your unit?  
本機完全不能操作。  
* 您是否已經重 設您的機組?  
4

A4 Tech PK 35N User Manual
Canon EF100 400mm f 4 5 5 6L IS USM User Manual
Dymo LETRATAG 100T User Manual
H2O Audio AMPHIBX WA E User Manual
Huey Chiao HCB22 User Manual
JBL GTO16T User Manual
JBL gto75 2 II User Manual
JBL GTO327 User Manual
JVC GR AXM800 User Manual
JVC GR DVL157 User Manual